2011 GMC Savana Owner

GMC Savana Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37
Performance and Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 Recommended Fluids,
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this
For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your
substitute the name “General dealer or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC
The names, logos, emblems, wherever it appears in this manual. On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and ® ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in If the vehicle has the Duramax concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Diesel engine, see the Duramax suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, the diesel supplement for additional and
GMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANA specific information on this engine. Helm, Incorporated
are trademarks and/or service P.O. Box 07130
Keep this manual in the vehicle for Detroit, MI 48207
marks of General Motors LLC, its quick reference.
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. 1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that Numéro de poste 6438 de langue
may or may not be on your specific française
vehicle either because they are www.helminc.com
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 25953302 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see the owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

Here are some additional symbols + : Fuses
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
information on the symbol, refer to Changer
the Index. j : LATCH System Child
9 : Airbag Readiness Light Restraints
# : Air Conditioning * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) : : Oil Pressure
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls } : Power
or OnStar / : Remote Vehicle Start
$ : Brake System Warning Light > : Safety Belt Reminders
" : Charging System 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
I : Cruise Control _ : Tow/Haul Mode
B : Engine Coolant Temperature d : Traction Control
O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Vehicle Features

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Performance and Maintenance
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-20
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Driving for Better Fuel
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Sensing System for Passenger Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6. I. Exterior Lamp Controls on P. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) page 6‑1. “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing
Buttons. See Driver Information J. Instrument Panel Illumination Equipment on page 9‑56.
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27. Control on page 6‑5. Q. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Dome Lamp Override. See R. StabiliTrak® System on
See Turn and Lane-Change Dome Lamps on page 6‑6. page 9‑37 (If Equipped).
Signals on page 6‑5. K. Cruise Control on page 9‑39 S. Airbag On-Off Switch on
Windshield Wiper/Washer on (If Equipped) . page 3‑33 (If Equipped) .
page 5‑4. Fast Idle System (If Equipped). T. Front Storage on page 4‑1.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on See the Duramax diesel U. Passenger Airbag Status
page 6‑4 (Out of View). supplement for more Indicator on page 5‑19
E. Instrument Cluster on information. (If Equipped).
page 5‑11. L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on OnStar® System Button.
F. Shift Lever. See Starting the page 5‑2. (If Equipped).
Engine on page 9‑20. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) V. Rear Heating System on
Manual Mode on page 9‑33 (Out of View). See Malfunction page 8‑3 (If Equipped).
(If Equipped). Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20.
W. USB Port. See Auxiliary
G. Climate Control Systems on N. Horn on page 5‑4. Devices on page 7‑18.
page 8‑1. O. Steering Wheel Controls on
H. Infotainment on page 7‑1. page 5‑2.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

2 seconds to sound the panic alarm.
Information
Press L again to cancel the panic
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the alarm.
important features that may or may See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
not be on your specific vehicle. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 2‑3.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be
Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter With Remote started from outside of the vehicle.
(RKE) System Start Shown Starting the Vehicle
The RKE transmitter is used to Press K to unlock the driver door. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
remotely lock and unlock the doors vehicle.
from up to 60 m (195 feet) away Press K again within 5 seconds to
from the vehicle. unlock all remaining doors. 2. Press Q.
Press j to unlock only the cargo 3. Immediately after completing
doors. Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
Press Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
personalized.
Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
In Brief 1-5
When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks Power Door Locks
lamps will turn on and remain on as
Manual Door Locks On vehicles with power door locks,
long as the engine is running. The
the switches are located on the
doors will be locked and the climate
doors.
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
T : Press to lock and unlock the
doors.
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.
start can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
Windows
To cancel a remote start: Manual Windows
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Operate the manual windows by
turning the hand crank on each door
vehicle and press and hold /
to raise or lower the side door
until the parking lamps turn off. windows.
. Turn on the hazard warning Lock and unlock the door from the
See Manual Windows on page 2‑16.
flashers. outside using the key or the Remote
. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
Turn the ignition on and then
if available. From the inside, slide
back off.
the manual lever on the door up
See Remote Vehicle Start on or down.
page 2‑5.
See Door Locks on page 2‑6.
1-6 In Brief
Power Windows Express‐Down Seat Adjustment

The driver window switch also has Manual Seats
an express-down feature that allows
the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press fully and
release the window switch marked
AUTO to activate the express-down
mode. This mode can be cancelled
at any time by pulling up on the
switch. To open the window part
way, lightly tap the switch until the
window is at the desired position.
See Power Windows on page 2‑16.
If the vehicle has power windows,
the controls are located on each of
the side doors. The driver door also To adjust a manual seat:
has a control to operate the front 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
passenger window.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
Press or pull up on the switch to position and release the bar.
lower or raise the window.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2.
In Brief 1-7
Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑3.
To adjust a power seat, if available, To recline the seatback:

use the controls on the front of 1. Lift the lever on the inboard side
the seat: of the seat.
. Adjust the seat by moving the 2. Move the seatback to the
center knob up, down, right, desired position, and then
or left. release the lever to lock the
. Raise and lower the front or rear seatback in place.
of the seat cushion by moving 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
the right or left lever up or down. make sure it is locked.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3.
1-8 In Brief
Safety Belts Airbag On-Off Switch

If the instrument panel has one of
the switches pictured in the
following illustrations, the vehicle
has an airbag on-off switch that you
can use to manually turn on or off
the right front passenger airbag.
Canada and Mexico

To operate the airbag on‐off switch,
Refer to the following sections for use the vehicle key.
important information on how to use See Airbag On-Off Switch on
safety belts properly. page 3‑33 for important information.
. Safety Belts on page 3‑9.
. How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑12. United States
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑52.
In Brief 1-9
Sensing System for Mirror Adjustment

Passenger Airbag Exterior Mirrors
The passenger sensing system, Vehicles with outside manual
if equipped, will turn off the right mirrors can be adjusted by moving
front passenger frontal airbag under the mirror up and down or left to
certain conditions. The driver airbag United States right so you can see a little of the
and roof‐rail airbags, if equipped, side of the vehicle, and have a clear
are not affected by this. view of objects behind you.
If the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system, the passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
Canada and Mexico
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37 for important information.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors

have controls located on the driver
side door.
1-10 In Brief
Select each mirror by turning the Manually fold the mirrors inward to Steering Wheel
knob clockwise for the passenger prevent damage when going
side mirror or counterclockwise for through an automatic car wash. To
Adjustment
the driver side mirror. Adjust the fold, pull the mirror toward the
mirror angle by moving the knob in vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
the desired direction. return it to the original position.
Keep the selector switch in the Interior Mirror
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror. Hold the inside rearview mirror in
the center to move it for a clearer
view behind the vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind. Push the tab,
located at the base of the mirror,
forward for daytime use and pull it
for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on For vehicles with a tilt steering
page 2‑15. wheel, the lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever to move the
steering wheel up or down into a
Vehicles with towing mirrors can be comfortable position.
adjusted manually for a clear view
2. Release the lever to lock the
of the objects behind you.
steering wheel in place.
See Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
In Brief 1-11
Interior Lighting E DOME OFF : This button is Exterior Lighting

located above the instrument panel
Dome Lamp brightness knob.
The dome lamps come on when any Press the button in and the dome
door is opened. They turn off after lamps remain off when a door is
all the doors are closed. opened. Press the button again so
that the dome lamps come on when
a door is opened.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps,
press the button located next to The exterior lamps control is located
each lamp to turn it on or off. on the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. The lamps O : Briefly turn the control to this
cannot be adjusted. position to turn the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running
For more information on interior Lamps (DRL) off or back on.
lighting, see:
The instrument panel brightness For vehicles first sold in Canada,
. Instrument Panel Illumination the off position only works for
knob extends when D is pressed. Control on page 6‑5. vehicles that are shifted into the
To manually turn on the dome . Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑7. P (Park) position.
lamps, press D then turn the knob
clockwise to the farthest position. In AUTO: Automatically turns on the
this position, the dome lamps headlamps, parking lamps,
remain on whether a door is opened taillamps, instrument panel lights,
or closed. and license plate lamps.
1-12 In Brief
; : Turns on the parking lamps, Windshield Wiper/Washer 6: Use to adjust the delay time
taillamps, instrument panel lights, between wipes. Turn the band up or
and license plate lamps. down for more frequent wipes or
2 : Turns on the headlamps, less frequent wipes.
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument d : Slow wipes.
panel lights, and license plate a : Fast wipes.
lamps.
For more information, see:
9 : Use to turn the wipers off.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
The lever is located on the left side L : Push the paddle on top of the
of the steering column. multifunction lever to spray washer
page 6‑1. fluid on the windshield.
. Exterior Lamps Off Reminder on
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 6‑2. page 5‑4.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
. Automatic Headlamp System on
page 6‑3.
In Brief 1-13
Climate Controls
The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with these
systems.
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
1-14 In Brief
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
The vehicle may have a Range

Selection Mode. The Range
Vehicles With Air Conditioning Selection Mode helps control the
vehicle's transmission and vehicle
A. Fan Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control speed while driving down hill or
B. Temperature Control D. Rear Window Defogger towing a trailer by letting you select
a desired range of gears.
See Climate Control Systems on
page 8‑1. See Rear Heating System
on page 8‑3 (If Equipped) or Rear
Climate Control System on page 8‑4
(If Equipped).
In Brief 1-15
To use this feature, do the following: Vehicle Features

1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual Mode). Radio(s)
2. Press the plus/minus buttons,
located on the steering column
shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving
conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected
a number displays in the DIC next to
the M indicating the current gear.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34.
While using Range Selection Mode,
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul
Mode can be used.
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

and off. Turn to increase or FM1, FM2, AM, and XM™.
decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
1-16 In Brief
4: Press to switch the display Storing a Favorite Station Setting the Clock
between the radio station frequency Depending on which radio the To set the time and date for the
and the time. While the ignition is vehicle has, radio stations are Radio with CD (MP3):
off, press this button to display the stored as either favorites or presets.
time. Press to display additional text 1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
information related to the current For vehicles with a FAV button, a DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
FM-RDS station or MP3 song. maximum of 36 stations can be day, and year) displays.
A choice of additional information stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio 2. Press the softkey located below
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and
station frequency tabs and by using any one of the tabs that you
CAT (category) can display.
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to want to change.
Continue pressing to highlight the
desired tab, or press the softkey go through up to six pages of 3. Increase or decrease the time or
located under any one of the tabs favorites, each having six favorite date, depending on the radio, by
and the information about that tab stations available per page. Each pressing the © SEEK ¨ arrows,
displays. page of favorites can contain any s / \ REV/FWD buttons or by
combination of AM and FM stations.
For more information about these turning f clockwise or
and other radio features, see If the radio does not have a FAV counterclockwise.
Infotainment on page 7‑1. button, up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), can be For detailed instructions on setting
programmed on the six numbered the clock for your specific audio
buttons. system, see Clock on page 5‑7.
For more information on storing a
favorite station, see Operation on
page 7‑3.
In Brief 1-17
Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

XM is a satellite radio service based This vehicle may have an auxiliary For vehicles with a Bluetooth
in the 48 contiguous United States input located on the radio faceplate system, it allows users with a
and 10 Canadian provinces. and a USB port located on the Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
XM satellite radio has a wide variety instrument panel. External devices make and receive hands-free calls
of programming and such as an iPod®, laptop computer, using the vehicle’s audio system
commercial-free music, coast to MP3 player, CD changer, or USB and controls.
coast, and in digital-quality sound. storage device can be connected to The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
A fee is required to receive the the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm must be paired with the Bluetooth
XM service. (1/8 in) input cable or the USB port system before it can be used in the
depending on the audio system. vehicle. Not all phones will support
For more information, refer to:
See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack" all functions. For more information,
. www.xmradio.com or call and "Using the USB Port" in visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑18. For more information, see Bluetooth
. www.xmradio.ca or call on page 7‑23.
1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.
1-18 In Brief
Steering Wheel Controls b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control

speakers only. Press again to turn
the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
if equipped.
+ e or − e : Press to increase or
decrease volume.
c / x : Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio and CD, and for equipped
vehicles, the front auxiliary.
For vehicles with audio steering ¨ : Press to seek the next radio For vehicles with cruise control, the
wheel controls, some audio controls station, the next track while sourced buttons are located on the left side
can be adjusted at the steering to the CD, or to select tracks and of the steering wheel.
wheel. folders on an iPod® or USB device. J: Turns the system on or off.
w or c / x : Press to change For more information, see Steering +RES: Press briefly to make the
favorite radio stations, select tracks Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. vehicle resume to a previously set
on a CD, or to navigate tracks or speed, or press and hold to
folders on an iPod® or USB device. accelerate.
In Brief 1-19
SET−: Press to set the speed and Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor
activate cruise control or press and
hold to decelerate. Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set StabiliTrak® System
speed from memory. The vehicle may have a traction
For more information, see Cruise control system that limits wheel spin
Control on page 9‑39. and the StabiliTrak system that
assists with directional control of the
Power Outlets vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Both systems turn on automatically The TPMS warning light alerts you
The accessory power outlets can be every time the vehicle is started.
used to plug in electrical equipment, to a significant loss in pressure of
such as a cell phone or an MP3
. To turn off both traction control one of the vehicle's tires. If the
player. and StabiliTrak, press and hold warning light comes on, stop as
d until d illuminates and the soon as possible and inflate the
The vehicle may have two appropriate DIC message tires to the recommended pressure
accessory power outlets located on displays. See Ride Control shown on the Tire and Loading
the instrument panel. System Messages on page 5‑36. Information label. See Vehicle Load
Remove the cover to access and . Limits on page 9‑12. The warning
Press and release the button
replace when not in use. again to turn on both systems. light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9. For more information, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.
1-20 In Brief
During cooler conditions, the low tire Resetting the Oil Life System Driving for Better Fuel
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Economy
with the engine off.
then turn off. This may be an early Driving habits can affect fuel
indicator that the tire pressures are 2. Fully press and release the mileage. Here are some driving tips
getting low and the tires need to be accelerator pedal three times to get the best fuel economy
inflated to the proper pressure. within five seconds. possible.
The TPMS does not replace normal 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate
monthly tire maintenance. It is the See Engine Oil Life System on smoothly.
driver’s responsibility to maintain page 10‑11. . Brake gradually and avoid
correct tire pressures.
abrupt stops.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . Avoid idling the engine for long
on page 10‑58.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge periods of time.
and a yellow fuel cap can use either . When road and weather
Engine Oil Life System unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel conditions are appropriate, use
The engine oil life system calculates containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). cruise control.
engine oil life based on vehicle use See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
and displays a DIC message when page 9‑44. For all other vehicles, . Always follow posted speed
it is necessary to change the engine use only the unleaded gasoline limits or drive more slowly when
oil and filter. The oil life system described under Recommended conditions require.
should be reset to 100% only Fuel on page 9‑42. . Keep vehicle tires properly
following an oil change. inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
In Brief 1-21
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar®
.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall If you have an active OnStar
near the size. subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will be
. Follow recommended scheduled
sent to an OnStar advisor who will
maintenance.
assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
Roadside Assistance your exact location to get the help
Program you need. For vehicles with an active OnStar
U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782 Online Owner Center subscription, OnStar uses several
(1‐800‐462-8782) innovative technologies and live
The Online Owner Center is a Advisors to provide a wide range of
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 complimentary service that includes safety, security, navigation,
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 online service reminders, vehicle diagnostics, and calling services.
maintenance tips, online owner
As the owner of a new GMC, you manual, special privileges, Automatic Crash Response
are automatically enrolled in the and more. In a crash, built‐in sensors can
Roadside Assistance program.
Sign up today at: automatically alert an OnStar
See Roadside Assistance Program www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.) Advisor who is immediately
on page 13‑6 for more information. or www.gm.ca (Canada). connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.
1-22 In Brief
How OnStar Service Works OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR technology compatible with

(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY OnStar service. Service involving
Q : Push this blue button to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push the location information about the
connect to a specially trained
OnStar Advisor to verify your
Q button to speak with an OnStar vehicle can’t work unless GPS
Advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days signals are available, unobstructed,
account information and to answer
a week. and compatible with the OnStar
questions.
For a full description of OnStar hardware. The vehicle has to have a
]: Push this red emergency
services and system limitations, see working electrical system and
button to get priority help from adequate battery power for the
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
specially trained OnStar Emergency OnStar equipment to operate.
glove box.
Advisors. OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar equipment isn’t properly
X: Push this button for hands‐free,
OnStar Terms and Conditions
voice‐activated calling and to give installed or you haven’t maintained
included in the OnStar Glove it and the vehicle is in good working
voice commands for Hands‐Free
Box Kit. order and in compliance with all
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation. OnStar service requires wireless government regulations. If you try to
communication networks and the add, connect, or modify any
Automatic Crash Response, equipment or software in the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, vehicle, OnStar service may not
satellite network. Not all OnStar
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle work. Other problems OnStar can’t
services are available everywhere
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, control may prevent service to you,
or on all vehicles at all times.
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling OnStar service can’t work unless weather, electrical system design
are available on most vehicles. Not the vehicle is in a place where and architecture of the vehicle,
all OnStar services are available on OnStar has an agreement with a damage to important parts of the
all vehicles. For more information, wireless service provider for service vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visit in that area, and the wireless network congestion or jamming.
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or service provider has coverage,
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact network capacity, reception, and
In Brief 1-23
See Radio Frequency Statement on Your Responsibility

page 13‑16 for information
Increase the volume of the radio if
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
Communications Commission (FCC)
heard.
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310. If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may not
OnStar Steering Wheel
be functioning properly. Push the Q
Controls
button and request a vehicle
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute diagnostic check. If the light
button that can be used to interact appears clear (no light appears),
with OnStar Hands-Free calling. your OnStar subscription has
See Steering Wheel Controls on expired and all services have been
page 5‑2 for more information. deactivated. Push the Q button to
On some vehicles, the Talk button confirm that the OnStar equipment
can be used to dial numbers into is active.
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
1-24 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Vehicle Security

Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Windows Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12
Exterior Mirrors
Keys and Locks Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Interior Mirrors
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Enhanced Technology
Doors Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Side Door (60/40 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance
Keys Program on page 13‑6.
{ WARNING Remote Keyless Entry

Leaving children in a vehicle with (RKE) System
the ignition key is dangerous for See Radio Frequency Statement on
many reasons. Children or others page 13‑16 for information
could be badly injured or even regarding Part 15 of the Federal
killed. They could operate the Communications Commission (FCC)
power windows or other controls rules and Industry Canada
The key is used for the ignition and Standards RSS-210/220/310.
or even make the vehicle move.
all door locks.
The windows will function with the If there is a decrease in the RKE
keys in the ignition and children The key has a bar-coded key tag operating range:
could be seriously injured or killed that the dealer or qualified locksmith
can use to make new keys. Store . Check the distance. The
if caught in the path of a closing
this information in a safe place, not transmitter may be too far from
window. Do not leave the keys in the vehicle.
a vehicle with children. in the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement . Check the location. Other
key or additional key is needed. vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.

. Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
in this section. driver door. If K is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining
. If the transmitter is still not doors unlock.
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician The interior lamps come on and
for service. stay on for 20 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on. If enabled
Remote Keyless Entry through the DIC, the parking lamps
flash twice to indicate unlocking
(RKE) System Operation has occurred. See Vehicle
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Personalization on page 5‑40 for
transmitter functions work up to RKE Transmitter With Remote additional information.
60 m (195 feet) away from the Start Shown j (Cargo Door): Press to unlock
vehicle. only the cargo doors.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock all
There are other conditions which doors. If enabled through the Driver / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the vehicles with this feature, press Q
transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. and then press and hold / within
locking has occurred.
five seconds to start the engine from
The horn may chirp when Q is outside the vehicle using the RKE
pressed again within five seconds. transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
See Vehicle Personalization on Start on page 2‑5 for additional
page 5‑40 for additional information. information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic When the replacement transmitter is

Alarm): Press and release to programmed to the vehicle, all
locate the vehicle. The turn signal remaining transmitters must also be
lamps flash and the horn sounds programmed. Any lost or stolen
three times. transmitters no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Press and hold L for more than Each vehicle can have up to
two seconds to activate the panic four transmitters programmed to it.
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for Battery Replacement
30 seconds. The alarm turns off Replace the battery if the REPLACE
when the ignition is moved to ON/ BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
RUN or L is pressed again. The message displays in the DIC. See
To replace the battery:
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
the panic alarm to work. KEY” under Key and Lock 1. Separate the transmitter with a
Messages on page 5‑36 for flat, thin object, such as a flat
Programming Transmitters to additional information. head screwdriver.
the Vehicle . Carefully insert the tool into
Notice: When replacing the
Only RKE transmitters programmed battery, do not touch any of the the notch located along the
to the vehicle will work. If a circuitry on the transmitter. Static parting line of the
transmitter is lost or stolen, a from your body could damage the transmitter. Do not insert
replacement can be purchased and transmitter. the tool too far. Stop as
programmed through your dealer. soon as resistance is felt.
. Twist the tool until the
transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive If the vehicle has the remote start When the engine starts, the
side facing down. Replace with a feature, the RKE transmitter parking lamps will turn on and
CR2032 or equivalent battery. functions will have an increased remain on while the engine is
4. Snap the transmitter back range of operation. However, the running. The doors will be
together. range may be less while the vehicle locked. The airbag readiness
is running. light will be on during a remote
start. It should turn off when the
Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
can affect the performance of the
This vehicle may have a remote transmitter, see Remote Keyless See Airbag Readiness Light on
start feature. This feature allows you Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for page 5‑16 for more information.
to start the engine from outside the additional information. 3. If it is the first remote start since
vehicle. It may also start the the vehicle has been driven,
vehicle's heating or air conditioning / (Remote Vehicle Start): This
repeat these steps, while the
systems. See Climate Control button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start. engine is still running, to extend
Systems on page 8‑1 for additional the engine running time by
information. To start the engine using the remote 10 minutes. Remote start can be
Laws in some local communities start feature: extended one time.
may restrict the use of remote 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the After entering the vehicle during a
starters. For example, some laws vehicle. remote start, insert and turn the key
may require a person using remote to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
start to have the vehicle in view 2. Press and release Q on the
when doing so. Check local transmitter, then immediately After a remote start, the engine
regulations for any requirements on press and hold / for will automatically shut off after
remote starting of vehicles. four seconds or until the turn 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the key is
Do not use the remote start feature signal lamps flash.
inserted into the ignition switch and
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The turned to ON/RUN.
vehicle may run out of fuel.

. Insert the key into the ignition
The maximum number of remote
switch and turn the switch to
Door Locks
starts between ignition cycles with
the key is two. ON/RUN and then back to
If the remote start procedure is
LOCK/OFF. { WARNING
used again before the first 10 minute The remote vehicle start feature will Unlocked doors can be
time frame has ended, the first not operate if: dangerous.
10 minutes will immediately expire . The key is in the ignition. . Passengers, especially
and the second 10 minute time . The hood is open. children, can easily open the
frame will start.
doors and fall out of a moving
After the engine has been remote
. The hazard warning flashers vehicle. When a door is
started two times, the ignition switch are on. locked, the handle will not
must be turned to ON/RUN and then . There is an emission control open it. The chance of being
back to LOCK/OFF using the key system malfunction. See thrown out of the vehicle in a
before the remote start procedure Malfunction Indicator Lamp on crash is increased if the
can be used again. page 5‑20. doors are not locked. So, all
To manually shut off the engine after . The engine coolant temperature passengers should wear
a remote start: is too high. safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . The oil pressure is low. whenever the vehicle is
vehicle and press / until the . Two remote vehicle starts have driven.
parking lamps turn off. already been provided. (Continued)
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 6‑4.
WARNING (Continued)
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks,
. Young children who get into the switches are located on the
unlocked vehicles may be doors.
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
T : Press the bottom of the switch
to lock all the doors at once. Press
and can suffer permanent
the top of the switch to unlock all
injuries or even death from the doors at once.
heat stroke. Always lock the To lock the door from the inside,
vehicle whenever leaving it. When a door is locked, the inside
slide the manual lever on the door door handle will not work.
. Outsiders can easily enter down. To unlock the door, slide the
through an unlocked door manual lever up.
when you slow down or stop
Cargo Door Relocking
From the outside, use the key.
the vehicle. Locking the doors If the cargo door is open when the
can help prevent this from If the vehicle is equipped with lock button is pressed on the door
happening. keyless entry, see Remote Keyless or the RKE transmitter, all doors will
Entry (RKE) System Operation on lock except the cargo door. The
page 2‑3. cargo door will only lock when they
are closed or when the delayed
locking feature functions.
Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks Safety Locks

When locking the doors with the The vehicle may have an automatic Security locks are located on the
power lock switch and a door open, lock/unlock feature. This feature can front portion of the 60/40 side
the doors will lock five seconds after be programmed using the Driver swing-out door or the side
the last door is closed. You will hear Information Center (DIC). See sliding door.
three chimes to signal that the Vehicle Personalization on
delayed locking feature is in use. page 5‑40 for more information on
DIC programming.
Pressing the e twice or the Q on
the RKE transmitter twice will Lockout Protection
override the delayed locking feature
and immediately lock all the doors. This feature protects you from
locking the key in the vehicle when
This feature will not operate if the
the key is in the ignition and a door
key is in the ignition.
is open.
This feature can be programmed
If the power lock switch is pressed
using the Driver Information
when either the driver, passenger,
Center (DIC). See “ Delay Door
or rear door is open, all the doors
Lock” in Vehicle Personalization on 60/40 Swing-Out Side
will lock and then the driver door will
page 5‑40. Door — Driver Side Shown,
unlock. This feature does not
include the side cargo door. Passenger Side Similar
If the vehicle has an ambulance For the 60/40 side swing-out door,
package, this feature is disabled. move the button to the right for the
driver side door or to the left for the
passenger side door to engage the
security feature.
Move the button to the left for the Doors

driver side door or to the right for
the passenger side door to return
the door locks to normal operation. Side Door
(60/40 Swing-Out)
To open the front portion of a

60/40 door from the inside, pull the
handle toward you and push the
door open.
Side Sliding Door
For the side sliding door, move the
To open the front portion of a
button up to engage the security
60/40 door from the outside, pull out
feature. Move the button down to
on the handle and open the door.
return the door locks to normal
operation.
To open the door beyond To close the sliding side door from
90 degrees, close the door partially, the outside, use the handle to slide
pull the check strap toward you and the door toward the front of the
then open the door. When the door vehicle.
is closed, the check strap will When the door is closed, it will be
automatically re-engage. flush with the side of the body.
Sliding Door
To open the rear portion of a

60/40 door from the outside, pull the
handle on the side of the rear door
and pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close
the rear door first. Then close the
front door. Check to make sure that
both doors are completely closed. To open the sliding side door from
The swing-out doors have a check the inside, pull the handle toward
To open the sliding side door from the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide
strap assembly in the door frame to the outside, pull the handle toward
keep the door from opening beyond the door toward the rear of the
the rear of the vehicle and slide the vehicle.
90 degrees. door open.
To close the sliding side door from

the inside, grasp the handle and WARNING (Continued)
slide the door toward the front of the
vehicle. doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
Make sure the door is completely driven.
closed before driving away. . Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
Rear Doors unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
{ WARNING and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
Unlocked doors can be heat stroke. Always lock the
dangerous. vehicle whenever leaving it. To open the driver side rear door,
pull the latch release at the inside
. Passengers, especially . Outsiders can easily enter edge of the door.
children, can easily open the through an unlocked door
doors and fall out of a moving when you slow down or stop To close the rear doors, close the
vehicle. When a door is the vehicle. Locking the doors driver side rear door first. Then
locked, the handle will not can help prevent this from close the passenger side rear door.
open it. The chance of being happening. Check to make sure both doors are
thrown out of the vehicle in a completely closed.
crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So, all To open the rear doors from the
passengers should wear outside, pull the handle toward you
safety belts properly and the to open the passenger side rear
door first.
(Continued)
Vehicle Security The system is automatically armed

when the key is removed from the
If the engine does not start and the
security message comes on, the
This vehicle has theft-deterrent ignition. key may have a damaged
features; however, they do not make transponder. Turn the ignition off
You do not have to manually arm or
it impossible to steal. and try again.
disarm the system.
If the engine still does not start, and
Immobilizer The security light will come on if
the key appears to be undamaged,
there is a problem with arming or
See Radio Frequency Statement on disarming the theft-deterrent try another ignition key. At this time,
page 13‑16 for information system. you may also want to check the
regarding Part 15 of the Federal instrument panel PASS KEY fuse.
Communications Commission (FCC) When the PASS-Key III+ system If the engine still does not start with
rules and Industry Canada senses that someone is using the the other key, the vehicle needs
Standards RSS-210/220/310. wrong key, it shuts down the service. If the vehicle does start, the
vehicle's starter and fuel systems. first key may be faulty. See your
Immobilizer Operation The starter will not work and fuel will dealer or a locksmith who can
stop being delivered to the engine. service the PASS-Key III+ to have a
This vehicle is equipped with the Anyone using a trial-and-error new key made. See Fuses and
PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized method to start the vehicle will be Circuit Breakers on page 10‑44.
Automotive Security System) discouraged because of the high
theft-deterrent system. number of electrical key codes.
PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft
deterrent system.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ To program the new key: 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if
decoder to learn the transponder additional keys are to be
value of a new or replacement key. 1. Verify the new key has 1 programmed.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed stamped on it.
If you lose or damage a
for the vehicle. This procedure is for 2. Insert the original, already PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
learning additional keys only. If all programmed key into the ignition or a locksmith who can service
the currently programmed keys are lock cylinder and start the PASS-Key III+ to have a new
lost or do not operate, you must see engine. If the engine will not key made.
your dealer or a locksmith who can start, see your dealer for service.
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys Do not leave the key or device that
made and programmed to the 3. After the engine has started, turn disarms or deactivates the
system. the key to LOCK/OFF and theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
remove the key.
See your dealer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a 4. Insert the key to be programmed
new key blank that is cut exactly as and turn it to ON/RUN within
the ignition key that operates the 10 seconds of removing the
system. previous key.
The security message will turn
off once the key has been
programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security
message went on due to how
quickly the key is programmed.
Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Adjust the mirrors by pressing the
Convex Mirrors mirror up and down and left and
right.
{ WARNING The mirrors can be manually folded
in or out.
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther On the lower portion of each mirror
away than they really are. If you is an auxiliary convex mirror.
cut too sharply into the right lane, A convex mirror's surface is curved
you could hit a vehicle on the so you can see more from the driver
seat. The auxiliary convex mirrors
right. Check the inside mirror or
can be adjusted manually by
glance over your shoulder before
pressing the mirror.
changing lanes.
Vehicles with towing mirrors can be
adjusted manually for a clear view
The passenger side mirror is convex of the objects behind you.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from On the lower portion of each mirror
the driver seat. there is an auxiliary convex mirror
that can be adjusted manually to
provide an extended field of view.
The mirrors can be manually folded
in or out.
Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors

For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Defogger): Press to heat
Manual Rearview Mirror
the mirrors. Hold the inside rearview mirror in
An indicator light in the button lights the center to move it for a clearer
when the outside heated mirrors are view behind the vehicle. Adjust the
activated. mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind. Push the tab
See “Rear Window Defogger” under forward for daytime use and pull it
Climate Control Systems on for nighttime use.
page 8‑1 for more information.
If you have a cargo van without the
rear door glass, the vehicle may not
have an inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors
have controls located on the driver
side door.
Select each mirror by turning the
knob clockwise for the passenger
side mirror or counterclockwise for
the driver side mirror. The center
position is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by
moving the knob in the desired
direction. The auxiliary convex
mirrors can only be adjusted
manually.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by the be badly injured or even killed.
extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or even
from heat stroke. Never leave a make the vehicle move. The
child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they
alone in a vehicle, especially with Manual Windows could be seriously injured or killed
the windows closed in warm or if caught in the path of a closing
Operate the manual windows by window. Do not leave keys in a
hot weather. turning the hand crank on each door vehicle with children.
to raise or lower the side door
windows. When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Press the switch to lower the Swing-Out Windows

window.
Pull up on the front edge of the
switch to raise the window.
Express‐Down
The driver window switch also has
an express-down feature that allows
the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press fully and
release the window switch marked
AUTO to activate the express-down
If the vehicle has power windows, mode. This mode can be cancelled
the controls are located on each of at any time by pulling up on the
Side Swing-Out Window
the side doors. switch. To open the window part
way, lightly tap the switch until the To open the side door swing-out
The driver door has a switch for the window, pull up on the latch at the
window is at the desired position.
passenger window also. The power edge of the window. Swing the
windows will work when the ignition window out and push down on the
has been turned to ON/RUN or latch to lock the window into place.
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is To close the window, pull the latch
active. See Retained Accessory toward you and push down on the
Power (RAP) on page 9‑23. latch to lock it.
Enhanced Technology all crashes. Even with this glass,

safety belts must still be worn at all
Glass times. For passenger vans, use only
The vehicle may be equipped with ETG glass approved for the vehicle
Enhanced Technology Glass (ETG). for replacement when damaged.
ETG is part of the overall occupant The following table shows laminated
protection system on passenger glass location, based on vehicle
vans. ETG may help to keep model and options.
passengers sitting next to these
fixed windows from being ejected
through the glass in some, but not in
Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐out
windows. The rear swing-out
windows work the same way as the
side swing out window, but the latch
is located at the bottom edge of the
window.
Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Eight Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window
Twelve and Fifteen Seat Sliding door forward window and
Passenger Vans rear-most side windows
Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows
Sun Visors Visor Vanity Mirror

To block out glare, swing down the The vehicle may have visor vanity
sun visors. You can also swing them mirrors, with or without lamps. Lift
to the side. the mirror cover to turn the lamps
on, if equipped.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Airbag System

Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Restraints Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27
When Should an Airbag
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49
Head Restraints What Makes an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Lower Anchors and Tethers
How Does an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Front Seats Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 What Will You See after an Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-33 Securing Child Restraints
Passenger Sensing (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-59
Rear Seats System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped (Front Seat-Passenger
Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Sensing System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Adding Equipment to the Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42 (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43 Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Use During Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Front Seats

On vehicles with factory installed
seats, the front seats have built-in Seat Adjustment
head restraints that are not
adjustable in the outboard seating { WARNING
positions.
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust the seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
the vehicle is not moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever on the inboard side
To adjust a power seat, if available, of the seat.
use the controls on the front of
the seat: { WARNING 2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
. Move the center knob to the If either seatback is not locked, it release the lever to lock the
right or left to move the seat could move forward in a sudden seatback in place.
forward or rearward. stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
. Move the center knob up or injury to the person sitting there. make sure it is locked.
down to raise or lower the seat. Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
. Move the right or left lever up or
locked.
down to raise or lower the front
or rear of the seat cushion.
To return the seatback to the upright

position: WARNING (Continued)
1. Lift the lever fully without The lap belt cannot do its job
applying pressure to the either. In a crash, the belt could
seatback, and the seatback will go up over your abdomen. The
return to the upright position. belt forces would be there, not at
2. Push and pull on the seatback to your pelvic bones. This could
make sure it is locked. cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
{ WARNING vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
Sitting in a reclined position when
back in the seat and wear the Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
safety belt properly. the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
Rear Seats
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the mini-latch plates for
the lap‐shoulder belts on the bench
seat to be removed.
Three-Passenger Seat Shown Three-Passenger Seat Shown

The left side pin has a gray cap The right side pin has a
with a black “L” marked on it. black cap with a white “R”
marked on it.
On a four-passenger seat, each
half of the seat has a set of pins.
The left side has a set
1. To do this, press the tip of a key marked “L,” and the right side
into the release hole of the has a set marked “R”.
safety belt buckle while pulling
up on the safety belt. If the vehicle has floor mats, the
pins are under a flap that has
2. Locate the pins. been cut into the mat.
On a three-passenger seat there
are two pins on the inboard sides
of the rear seats.
3. Pull the pin handle up to

disengage the pin from the
retaining clip, and then pull the
pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the
other pins.
5. Pull the seat rearward about
5 cm (2 in), and then lift the seat
from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the
vehicle.
7. For the second- and third-row For the last row of seats, stow
seats, stow the safety belt latch the safety belt latch plate on the
by attaching the clip on the clip at the window trim. Roll the
safety belt latch to the trim just mini-latch into the safety belt
inside the side door. webbing and then hook the
safety belt latch plate on the clip.
Reinstalling the Rear Seats 2. Locate the hole in the rail to

{ WARNING install the locking pins at the rear
{ WARNING A safety belt that is improperly
of the seat base. If the vehicle
has floor mats, pull the flap that
routed, not properly attached, has been cut into the mat.
A seat that is not locked into
or twisted will not provide the
place properly can move around 3. Insert the locking pins into the
protection needed in a crash. The
in a collision or sudden stop. seat base and push the seat to
person wearing the belt could be
People in the vehicle could be line up the pins with the base.
seriously injured. After raising the
injured. Be sure to lock the seat
rear seatback, always check to be On a three-passenger seat,
into place properly when the pin with the black cap
sure that the safety belts are
installing it. marked “R” must be installed on
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted. the right side and the pin with
the gray cap marked “L” on the
left side.
1. Position the seat into the open
slots in both rails. Push the seat On a four-passenger seat, the
forward in the rail, hooking both pins marked “R” must be
seat bases onto the pins inside installed on the half of the seat
of the rails. on the right side. The pins
marked “L” must be installed on
the half of the seat on the
left side.
7. Repeat this procedure for the

other seat base.
8. Connect the mini-latch plates for
the lap-shoulder belts by
inserting the latch plates into the
mini-buckles attached at the
outboard positions of the bench
seat. Do not twist the belt.
9. Check that all locking pins are
locked into place before
operating the vehicle.
Three-Passenger Seat Shown Three-Passenger Seat Shown
4. Push the pin(s) marked “R” down 5. Push the pin(s) marked “L” down
until they are in the until they are in the
retaining clip. retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put
the flap back to its original
position.
Safety Belts { WARNING

In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why:
describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in a
properly. It also describes some
of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash. If you do have a crash, you
things not to do with safety belts.
riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a
serious one.
{ WARNING likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even
safety belt cannot be worn not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
passenger(s) are not wearing the vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
ejected from the vehicle. You and reminder to buckle the safety belts.
your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety
seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑16 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
same crash, you might not be, In most crashes buckling up does
if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot!
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
With safety belts, you slow down

as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... A: You could be — whether you are
stopped by something. In a real wearing a safety belt or not. But
vehicle, it could be the windshield... your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
or the safety belts!

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Most accidents occur within It is very important for all occupants
should I have to wear safety 40 km (25 mi) of home. And the to buckle up. Statistics show that
belts? greatest number of serious unbelted people are hurt more often
A: Airbags are supplemental injuries and deaths occur at in crashes than those who are
systems only; so they work with speeds of less than wearing safety belts.
safety belts — not instead of 65 km/h (40 mph). Occupants who are not buckled up
them. Whether or not an airbag Safety belts are for everyone. can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
is provided, all occupants still crash. And they can strike others in
have to buckle up to get the How to Wear Safety Belts the vehicle who are wearing safety
most protection. That is true not Properly belts.
only in frontal collisions, but First, before you or your
especially in side and other This section is only for people of
adult size. passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
collisions. there is important information you
Q: If I am a good driver, and I Be aware that there are special should know.
never drive far from home, things to know about safety belts
why should I wear safety and children. And there are different
belts? rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the
A: You may be an excellent driver, vehicle, see Older Children on
but if you are in a crash — even page 3‑44 or Infants and Young
one that is not your fault — you Children on page 3‑46. Follow those
and your passenger(s) can be rules for everyone's protection.
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a

sudden stop or crash. { WARNING
Q: What is wrong with this? You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Sit up straight and always keep your

feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
applies force to the strong pelvic It will not give as much
bones and you would be less likely protection this way.
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
not give nearly as much buckle.
protection this way.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place belt goes over an armrest like
like this. In a crash, the belt would this. The belt would be much too
go up over your abdomen. The high. In a crash, you can slide
belt forces would be there, not on under the belt. The belt force
the pelvic bones. This could would then be applied on the
cause serious internal injuries. abdomen, not on the pelvic
Always buckle the belt into the bones, and that could cause
buckle nearest you. serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body.
the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the
the shoulder at all times. chest.
Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING { WARNING
You can be seriously injured by You can be seriously injured by a
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt twisted belt. In a crash, you would
properly. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
not be restrained by the shoulder to spread impact forces. If a belt
belt. Your body could move too is twisted, make it straight so it
far forward increasing the chance can work properly, or ask your
of head and neck injury. You dealer to fix it.
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across
go over the shoulder and across the body.
the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
All seating positions in the vehicle get twisted.
have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are
using a rear seating position with a The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
detachable safety belt and the you pull the belt across you very
safety belt is not attached, see quickly. If this happens, let the
“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” under belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Rear Seats on page 3‑5 for Then pull the belt across you
instructions on reconnecting the more slowly.
safety belt to the mini-buckle. If the shoulder portion of a
The following instructions explain passenger belt is pulled out all
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. 3. Push the latch plate into the
properly. buckle until it clicks.
If this happens, let the belt go
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is back all the way and start again. Pull up on the latch plate to
adjustable, so you can sit up make sure it is secure. If the belt
straight. To see how, see “Seats” is not long enough, see Safety
in the Index. Belt Extender on page 3‑23.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Safety Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a safety belt height
height that is right for you.
adjuster for the driver and right front
See “Safety Belt Height Adjuster”
passenger positions.
later in this section for
instructions on use and Adjust the height so the shoulder
important safety information. portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
To unlatch the belt, push the button to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
on the buckle. The belt should page 3‑12.
return to its stowed position. Slide
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a
It may be necessary to pull door is slammed against a safety
stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the
through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle.
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
After the adjuster is set to the Although the safety belt

desired position, try to move it down pretensioners cannot be seen,
without pushing in to make sure it they are part of the safety belt
has locked into position. assembly. They can help tighten the
safety belts during the early stages
Safety Belt Pretensioners of a moderate to severe frontal,
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight near frontal, or rear crash if the
Rating) of the vehicle is below threshold conditions for pretensioner
3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehicle activation are met. And, if the
has safety belt pretensioners for the vehicle has side impact airbags,
front outboard occupants. See safety belt pretensioners can help
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 to tighten the safety belts in a side
locate the certification label which crash or a rollover event.
To move it down, pull on the center
contains the GVWR. Pretensioners work only once. If the
adjuster control labeled PULL. You
can move the height adjuster up just pretensioners are activated in a
by pushing up on the shoulder belt crash, the pretensioners and
guide. possibly other parts of the safety
belt system will need to be replaced.
See Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash on page 3‑24.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats
and for some adults. When installed
and properly adjusted, the comfort
guide positions the shoulder belt
away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort 2. Place the guide over the belt,
guide to the safety belt: and insert the two edges of the
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on belt into the slots of the guide.
the side of the seatback.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts,
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety anchorages are working properly.
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them Look for any other loose or
wear safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
long enough for you. To help avoid information.
personal injury, do not let someone
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.
seat it is made to fit. The extender
A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
possible, below the rounding, belt. For more information, see the
throughout the pregnancy. instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
Keep belts clean and dry. System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that
Crash were used during any crash may
{ WARNING have been stressed or damaged.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

{ WARNING See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
It may severely weaken them. In A crash can damage the safety replaced.
a crash, they might not be able to belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be
provide adequate protection. A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt
Clean safety belts only with mild may not properly protect the system was not being used at the
soap and lukewarm water. person using it, resulting in time of the crash.
serious injury or even death in a
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary or while you are driving. See Airbag
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑16.
possible.
Airbag System If you have a passenger van

with a right front passenger
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
The vehicle has the following roof-rail airbag and a sliding in the trim or on an attached label
airbag: door, you will also have a near the deployment opening.
. A frontal airbag for the driver. separate roof-rail airbag for the For frontal airbags, the word
passenger seated directly AIRBAG will appear on the middle
The vehicle may have the following behind the right front passenger
airbags: part of the steering wheel for the
and the third row outboard driver and on the instrument panel
. A frontal airbag for the right front passenger position. for the right front passenger.
passenger. . A roof-rail airbag for the driver, With roof-rail airbags, the word
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the passenger seated directly AIRBAG will appear along the
(cargo van). behind the driver, and the third headliner or trim.
.
row outboard passenger position
A roof-rail airbag for the right (passenger van equipped with a
front passenger position sliding or hinged door).
(cargo or passenger van
. A roof-rail airbag for the right
equipped with a sliding door).
front passenger, the passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger, and the
third row outboard passenger
position (passenger van
equipped with a hinged door).
Here are the most important things

to know about the airbag system: { WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
{ WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag
You can be severely injured or Anyone who is up against, or very when it inflates can be seriously
killed in a crash if you are not close to, any airbag when it injured or killed. Airbags plus
wearing your safety belt — even if inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
you have airbags. Airbags are or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle safety belt
Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is
deploy in every crash. In some Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young
crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a children and infants need the
restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety protection that a child restraint
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29. belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. Children on page 3‑44 or Infants
of hitting things inside the vehicle and Young Children on
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side page 3‑46.
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt roof-rail airbags.
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag If the vehicle has one, the right front
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for passenger airbag is in the
more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the
middle of the steering wheel. passenger side.
For passenger vans with a sliding

door, on the passenger side of the
vehicle, you will have a separate
roof-rail airbag for the passenger
seated directly behind the right front
passenger and the third row
outboard passenger position.
{ WARNING
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger airbag might not inflate properly
Side Similar Side Similar or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
If the vehicle is a cargo or If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags
or even death. The path of an
passenger van with a sliding door for the driver, right front passenger,
inflating airbag must be kept
and it has a roof-rail airbag for the passengers behind the driver and
driver and right front passenger right front passenger, and the third clear. Do not put anything
position, the roof-rail airbags are in row outboard passengers, the between an occupant and an
the ceiling above the side window. roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling airbag, and do not attach or put
above the side windows. On the anything on the steering wheel
driver side of the vehicle, there is hub or on or near any other
one single roof-rail airbag for either airbag covering.
vehicles with a hinged door or a (Continued)
sliding door.
Whether the frontal airbags will or

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object
WARNING (Continued) should deploy is not based on how (like a pole), the airbags could
fast the vehicle is traveling. inflate at a different crash speed
Never secure anything to the roof than if the vehicle hits a wide
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how object (like a wall).
by routing a rope or tie down
quickly the vehicle slows down. . If the vehicle goes into an object
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an Frontal airbags may inflate at at an angle, the airbags could
inflating roof-rail airbag will be different crash speeds. For inflate at a different crash speed
example: than if the vehicle goes straight
blocked.
into the object.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate Thresholds can also vary with
When Should an Airbag at a different crash speed than if specific vehicle design.
Inflate? the vehicle hits a moving object. Frontal airbags are not intended to
Frontal airbags are designed to . If the vehicle hits an object that inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
inflate in moderate to severe frontal deforms, the airbags could impacts, or in many side impacts.
or near-frontal crashes to help inflate at a different crash speed
reduce the potential for severe than if the vehicle hits an object
injuries mainly to the driver or right that does not deform.
front passenger head and chest.
However, they are only designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Single Stage vs. Dual Stage Dual-stage airbags adjust the Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
Airbags restraint according to crash severity. inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
Depending on the weight of the The vehicle has electronic frontal impacts, or rear impacts. All roof-rail
vehicle, you will have either “Single sensors, which help the sensing airbags will deploy when either side
Stage Airbags” or “Dual Stage system distinguish between a of the vehicle is struck.
Airbags.” Vehicles that have a moderate frontal impact and a more In any particular crash, no one can
passenger sensing system also severe frontal impact. For moderate say whether an airbag should have
have dual stage airbags. See frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflated simply because of the
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator inflate at a level less than full damage to a vehicle or because of
on page 5‑19 or Passenger Sensing deployment. For more severe frontal what the repair costs were.
System on page 3‑37. impacts, full deployment occurs. For frontal airbags, inflation is
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight The vehicle may or may not have determined by what the vehicle hits,
Rating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System the angle of the impact, and how
(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle may on page 3‑25. Roof-rail airbags are quickly the vehicle slows down.
have single stage airbags. If the intended to inflate in moderate to For roof-rail airbags, deployment is
GVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) severe side crashes. In addition, determined by the location and
then the vehicle may have dual these roof-rail airbags are intended severity of the side impact.
stage airbags. You can find the to inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag
GVWR on the certification label on airbags will inflate if the crash deployment is determined by the
the rear edge of the driver door. See severity is above the system's direction of the roll.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 designed threshold level. The
for more information. threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
What Makes an Airbag How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
Inflate? Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the
In a deployment event, the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the
system sends an electrical signal near frontal collisions, even belted first, second, and third rows,
triggering a release of gas from the occupants can contact the steering if equipped. The rollover capable
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the wheel or the instrument panel. In roof-rail airbags are designed to
airbag causing the bag to break out moderate to severe side collisions, help reduce the risk of full or partial
of the cover and deploy. The inflator, even belted occupants can contact ejection in rollover events, although
the airbag, and related hardware are the inside of the vehicle. no system can prevent all such
all part of the airbag module. ejections.
Airbags supplement the protection
Frontal airbag modules are located provided by safety belts. Frontal But airbags would not help in many
inside the steering wheel and airbags distribute the force of the types of collisions, primarily
instrument panel. For vehicles with impact more evenly over the because the occupant's motion is
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag occupant's upper body, stopping the not toward those airbags. See
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, occupant more gradually. Roof-rail When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
near the side windows for the first, airbags distribute the force of the page 3‑29 for more information.
second, and third rows (if equipped). impact more evenly over the Airbags should never be regarded
See Where Are the Airbags? on occupant's upper body. as anything more than a supplement
page 3‑27 for more information. to safety belts.
What Will You See after The vehicle has a feature that may
an Airbag Inflates?
{ WARNING automatically unlock the doors
(if equipped with power door locks),
After the frontal airbags inflate, they When an airbag inflates, there turn on the interior lamps and
quickly deflate, so quickly that some may be dust in the air. This dust hazard warning flashers, and shut
people may not even realize an could cause breathing problems off the fuel system after the airbags
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags for people with a history of inflate. You can lock the doors, and
may still be at least partially inflated asthma or other breathing trouble. turn off the interior lamps and the
for some time after they deploy. To avoid this, everyone in the hazard warning flashers by using
Some components of the airbag vehicle should get out as soon as the controls for those features.
module may be hot for several it is safe to do so. If you have
minutes. For location of the airbag breathing problems but cannot
modules, see What Makes an get out of the vehicle after an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑31. airbag inflates, then get fresh air
The parts of the airbag that come by opening a window or a door.
into contact with you may be warm, If you experience breathing
but not too hot to touch. There may problems following an airbag
be some smoke and dust coming deployment, you should seek
from the vents in the deflated medical attention.
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
In many crashes severe enough to

. The vehicle has a crash sensing
{ WARNING inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which
broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a
A crash severe enough to inflate Additional windshield breakage may crash. See Vehicle Data
the airbags may have also also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on
damaged important functions in passenger airbag. page 13‑15 and Event Data
the vehicle, such as the fuel Recorders on page 13‑15.
system, brake and steering
. Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
. Let only qualified technicians
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle work on the airbag systems.
inflates, you will need some new
appears to be drivable after a Improper service can mean that
parts for the airbag system.
moderate crash, there may be an airbag system will not work
If you do not get them, the airbag
concealed damage that could system will not be there to help properly. See your dealer for
make it difficult to safely operate protect you in another crash. service.
the vehicle. A new system will include airbag
Use caution if you should attempt modules and possibly other Airbag On-Off Switch
to restart the engine after a crash parts. The service manual for If the instrument panel has one of
has occurred. the vehicle covers the need to the switches pictured in the
replace other parts. following illustrations, the vehicle
has an airbag on-off switch that you
can use to manually turn on or off
the right front passenger airbag.
If the vehicle does not have an Child age 1 to 12. A child

airbag on-off switch, it may have a age 1 to 12 must ride in the front
passenger sensing system. See seat because:
Passenger Sensing System on . My vehicle has no rear seat;
page 3‑37.
. Although children ages 1 to 12
This switch should only be turned to ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
the off position if the person in the possible, children ages 1 to 12
right front passenger position is a sometimes must ride in the front
member of a passenger risk group because no space is available in
identified by the national the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
government as follows:
. The child has a medical
United States Infant. An infant (less than condition which, according to the
1 year old) must ride in the front child's physician, makes it
seat because: necessary for the child to ride in
. My vehicle has no rear seat; the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the
. My vehicle has a rear seat too child's condition.
small to accommodate a
rear-facing infant seat; or
. The infant has a medical
condition which, according to the
infant's physician, makes it
necessary for the infant to ride in
the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the
Canada and Mexico child's condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger

has a medical condition which, { WARNING
according to his or her physician:
If the right front passenger airbag
. Causes the passenger airbag to is turned off for a person who is
pose a special risk for the not in a risk group identified by
passenger; and the national government, that
. Makes the potential harm from person will not have the extra
the passenger airbag in a crash protection of an airbag. In a
greater than the potential harm crash, the airbag will not be able
from turning off the airbag and to inflate and help protect the
allowing the passenger, even if person sitting there. Do not turn
belted, to hit the dashboard or off the passenger airbag unless United States
windshield in a crash. the person sitting there is in a risk
group.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For
example, the right front
passenger airbag could inflate
even though the airbag on-off
switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or
Canada and Mexico others, have the vehicle serviced United States
To turn off the right front passenger right away. See Airbag Readiness
frontal airbag, insert the ignition key Light on page 5‑16 for more
into the switch, push in, and move information, including important
the switch to the off position. safety information.
The airbag off light will come on to
let you know the right front
passenger airbag is off. The airbag
off light will stay on to remind you
that the airbag is off. See Airbag
On-Off Light on page 5‑17. The right
front passenger airbag will remain
off until you turn it back on again.
Canada and Mexico
To turn the right front passenger When the system check is

airbag on again, insert the ignition complete, either the word ON or the
key into the switch, push in, and word OFF, or the symbol for on or
move the switch to the on position. the symbol for off, will be visible.
The right front passenger frontal See Passenger Airbag Status
airbag is now enabled, and Indicator on page 5‑19.
may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light United States The passenger sensing system will
on page 5‑17 for more information. turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain
Passenger Sensing conditions. The driver airbag and
roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are not
System part of the passenger sensing
If the instrument panel has one of system.
the indicators pictured in the
Canada and Mexico The passenger sensing system
following illustrations, the vehicle
works with sensors that are part of
has a passenger sensing system The passenger airbag status the right front passenger seat. The
unless there is an airbag off switch indicator will be visible on the sensors are designed to detect the
located on the instrument panel. instrument panel when the vehicle is presence of a properly seated
If there is an airbag off switch, the started. occupant and determine if the right
vehicle does not have a passenger
The words ON and OFF, or the front passenger frontal airbag
sensing system. See Airbag On-Off
symbol for on and off, will be visible should be enabled (may inflate)
Switch on page 3‑33 for more
during the system check. If you are or not.
information.
using remote start, if equipped, to
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system check.
According to accident statistics,

Children are safer when properly WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to
and size. be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a
airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat.
We recommend that children be child restraint can be seriously
secured in a rear seat, including: an injured or killed if the right front
infant or a child riding in a If the vehicle does not have a rear
passenger airbag inflates and the seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
passenger seat is in a forward rear-facing child restraint, a
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
position. rear-facing child restraint should not
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing be installed in the vehicle, even if
enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right the airbag is off.
A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no The passenger sensing system is
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can designed to turn off the right front
the front.” This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not passenger frontal airbag if:
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual . The right front passenger seat is
if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the unoccupied.
airbag is turned off.
. The system determines that an
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child infant is present in a rear-facing
restraints in a rear seat, even if infant seat.
A child in a rear-facing child the airbag is off. If you secure a
restraint can be seriously injured . The system determines that a
forward-facing child restraint in
or killed if the right front small child is present in a child
the right front seat, always move restraint.
passenger airbag inflates. This is the front passenger seat as far
because the back of the
(Continued)
(Continued)

. The system determines that a The passenger sensing system is
small child is present in a designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING
booster seat. right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever
. A right front passenger takes
person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means
his/her weight off of the seat for
properly in the right front that something may be wrong
a period of time.
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
. The right front passenger seat is avoid injury to yourself or others,
occupied by a smaller person, When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
such as a child who has system has allowed the airbag to be
away. See Airbag Readiness
outgrown child restraints. enabled, the on indicator will light
Light on page 5‑16 for more
and stay lit to remind you that the
. Or, if there is a critical problem airbag is active. information, including important
with the airbag system or the safety information.
passenger sensing system. For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
When the passenger sensing very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator is Lit for a
system has turned off the right front sensing system may or may not Child Restraint
passenger frontal airbag, the off turn off the right front passenger
indicator will light and stay lit to If a child restraint has been installed
frontal airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
remind you that the airbag is off. person's seating posture and body
See Passenger Airbag Status build. Everyone in the vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Indicator on page 5‑19. who has outgrown child restraints 2. Remove the child restraint from
should wear a safety belt the vehicle.
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint If the on indicator is still lit, because that person is not sitting
following the directions provided secure the child in the child properly in the seat. If this happens,
by the child restraint restraint in a rear seat position in use the following steps to allow the
manufacturer and refer to the vehicle, and check with your system to detect that person and
Securing Child Restraints (Rear dealer. enable the right front passenger
Seat Position) on page 3‑59 or If no rear seat is available, do frontal airbag:
Securing Child Restraints (Front not install a child restraint in this 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Seat-Passenger Sensing vehicle.
System) on page 3‑62 or 2. Remove any additional material
Securing Child Restraints (Front If the Off Indicator is Lit for an from the seat, such as blankets,
Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on Adult-Size Occupant cushions, seat covers, seat
page 3‑65. heaters, or seat massagers.
5. If, after reinstalling the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully
restraint and restarting the upright position.
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, 4. Have the person sit upright in
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly the seat, centered on the seat
recline the vehicle seatback and cushion, with legs comfortably
adjust the seat cushion, extended.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
pushing the child restraint into person remain in this position for
the seat cushion. two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
6. Restart the vehicle.
This allows the system to detect that
If a person of adult-size is sitting in person and then enable the right
the right front passenger seat, but front passenger frontal airbag.
the off indicator is lit, it could be
Additional Factors Affecting The on indicator may be lit if an purchase a service manual, see
System Operation object, such as a briefcase, Service Publications Ordering
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Information on page 13‑12.
Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on an
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
{ WARNING
braking, which helps the passenger the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the
sensing system maintain the
ignition is turned off and the
passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” { WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag
in the Index for additional can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you
information about the importance of
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it
proper restraint use.
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
A thick layer of additional material, seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the
such as a blanket or cushion, proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. proper service procedures, and
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
make sure the person performing
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system Servicing the work for you is qualified to do so.
operates. We recommend that you Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when Airbags affect how the vehicle
approved by GM for your specific should be serviced. There are parts
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to of the airbag system in several
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on places around the vehicle. Your
page 3‑42 for more information dealer and the service manual have
about modifications that can affect information about servicing the
how the system operates. vehicle and the airbag system. To
Adding Equipment to the In addition, the vehicle may If you have any questions
have a passenger sensing about this, you should contact
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system for the right front Customer Assistance before you
Q: Is there anything I might add passenger position, which modify the vehicle. The phone
to or change about the vehicle includes sensors that are part of numbers and addresses for
that could keep the airbags the passenger seat. The Customer Assistance are in
from working properly? passenger sensing system may Step Two of the Customer
not operate properly if the Satisfaction Procedure in this
A: Yes. If you add things that
original seat trim is replaced manual. See Customer
change the vehicle's frame,
with non-GM covers, upholstery Satisfaction Procedure on
bumper system, height, front end
or trim, or with GM covers, page 13‑1.
or side sheet metal, they may
upholstery or trim designed for a If the vehicle has rollover
keep the airbag system from
different vehicle. Any object, roof-rail airbags, see Different
working properly. Changing or
such as an aftermarket seat Size Tires and Wheels on
moving any parts of the front
heater or a comfort enhancing page 10‑67 for additional
seats, safety belts, the airbag
pad or device, installed under or important information.
sensing and diagnostic module,
on top of the seat fabric, could
steering wheel, instrument
also interfere with the operation
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
of the passenger sensing
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
system. This could either
trim, front sensors, rollover
prevent proper deployment of
sensor module, or airbag wiring
the passenger airbag(s) or
can affect the operation of the
prevent the passenger sensing
airbag system.
system from properly turning off
the passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37.
Q: Because I have a disability, Notice: If an airbag covering is

I have to get my vehicle damaged, opened, or broken, the WARNING (Continued)
modified. How can I find out airbag may not work properly. Do
whether this will affect my not open or break the airbag systems are working properly
airbag system? coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
opened or broken airbag covers, inspected and any necessary
A: If you have questions, call replacements made as soon as
Customer Assistance. The have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the possible.
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in location of the airbag modules,
Step Two of the Customer see What Makes an Airbag If an airbag inflates, you will need to
Satisfaction Procedure in this Inflate? on page 3‑31. See your replace airbag system parts. See
manual. See Customer dealer for service. your dealer for service.
Satisfaction Procedure on If the airbag readiness light stays on
page 13‑1. Replacing Airbag System after the vehicle is started or comes
In addition, your dealer and the Parts after a Crash on when you are driving, the airbag
service manual have information system may not work properly. Have
about the location of the airbag { WARNING the vehicle serviced right away. See
sensors, sensing and diagnostic Airbag Readiness Light on
module and airbag wiring. A crash can damage the page 5‑16 for more information.
airbag systems in the vehicle.
Airbag System Check A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and may
The airbag system does not need not protect you and your
regularly scheduled maintenance or passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
replacement. Make sure the airbag in serious injury or even death. To
readiness light is working. See
help make sure the airbag
Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑16 for more information. (Continued)

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child Q: What is the proper way to
passes the fit test below: wear safety belts?
. Sit all the way back on the seat. A: An older child should wear a
Do the knees bend at the seat lap-shoulder belt and get the
edge? If yes, continue. If no, additional restraint a shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt can provide. The shoulder
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. belt should not cross the face or
Does the shoulder belt rest on neck. The lap belt should fit
the shoulder? If yes, continue. snugly below the hips, just
If no, try using the rear safety touching the top of the thighs.
belt comfort guide. See “Rear This applies belt force to the
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” child's pelvic bones in a crash.
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on It should never be worn over the
Older children who have outgrown abdomen, which could cause
booster seats should wear the severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not
vehicle safety belts. injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
. Does the lap belt fit low and Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
snug on the hips, touching the page 3‑18.
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,

children and infants are safer when { WARNING
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint Never do this.
system secured in a rear seating Never allow two children to wear
position. the same safety belt. The safety
In a crash, children who are not belt cannot properly spread the
buckled up can strike other people impact forces. In a crash, the two
who are buckled up, or can be children can be crushed together
thrown out of the vehicle. Older and seriously injured. A safety
children need to use safety belts belt must be used by only one
properly. person at a time.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this. Children can be seriously injured
Never allow a child to wear the or strangled if a shoulder belt is
safety belt with the shoulder belt wrapped around their neck and
behind their back. A child can be the safety belt continues to
seriously injured by not wearing tighten. Never leave children
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a unattended in a vehicle and never
crash, the child would not be allow children to play with the
restrained by the shoulder belt. safety belts.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer
head and neck injury. The child
Infants and Young protection for adults and older
might also slide under the lap Children children, but not for young children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never do this. child restraint in the right front
Never hold an infant or a child seat, always move the front
while riding in a vehicle. Due to passenger seat as far back as it
crash forces, an infant or a child will go.
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be { WARNING
secured in an appropriate Never do this.
restraint.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of The restraint manufacturer's

add-on child restraints? instructions that come with the { WARNING
A: Add-on child restraints, which restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
are purchased by the vehicle so small that the vehicle's regular
owner, are available in four basic child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
types. Selection of a particular the hip bones, as it should.
restraint should take into available for children with
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
consideration not only the child's the child's abdomen. In a crash,
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will { WARNING the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used. To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
For most basic types of child injuries. To reduce the risk of
need complete support. This is
restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a
because an infant's neck is not
different models available. When
fully developed and its head crash, young children should
purchasing a child restraint, be
weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the the rest of its body. In a crash, an child restraints.
restraint will have a label saying infant in a rear-facing child
that it meets federal motor restraint settles into the restraint,
vehicle safety standards. so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the
A rear-facing infant seat (A) body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
provides restraint with the seating A booster seat can also help a child
surface against the back of the to see out the window.
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child endangered in a crash if the child In some areas of the United States
Restraint in the Vehicle restraint is not properly secured in and Canada, Certified Child
the vehicle. Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
{ WARNING When securing an add-on child
and demonstrate how to correctly
restraint, refer to the instructions
A child can be seriously injured that come with the restraint which use and install child restraints. In
or killed in a crash if the child may be on the restraint itself or in a the U.S., refer to the National
restraint is not properly secured in booklet, or both, and to this manual. Highway Traffic Safety
The child restraint instructions are Administration (NHTSA) website to
the vehicle. Secure the child
important, so if they are not locate the nearest child safety seat
restraint properly in the vehicle
available, obtain a replacement inspection station. For CPST
using the vehicle safety belt or
copy from the manufacturer. availability in Canada, check with
LATCH system, following the Transport Canada or the Provincial
instructions that came with that Keep in mind that an unsecured Ministry of Transportation office.
child restraint and the instructions child restraint can move around in a
in this manual. collision or sudden stop and injure Securing the Child Within the
people in the vehicle. Be sure to Child Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, properly secure any child restraint in
the child restraint must be secured the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
{ WARNING
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle A child can be seriously injured or
seats by lap belts or the lap belt killed in a crash if the child is not
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by properly secured in the child
the LATCH system. See Lower restraint. Secure the child
Anchors and Tethers for Children properly following the instructions
(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for that came with that child restraint.
more information. Children can be
Where to Put the Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off

WARNING (Continued)
Switch) on page 3‑65 for more
Restraint information, including important
According to accident statistics, safety information. Even if the passenger sensing
children and infants are safer when system or airbag switch has
A label on the sun visor says, turned off the right front
properly restrained in a child “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
restraint system or infant restraint passenger frontal airbag, no
the front.” This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can
system secured in a rear seating the rear-facing child is so great,
position. guarantee that an airbag will not
if the airbag deploys.
deploy under some unusual
We recommend that children and
circumstance, even though it is
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
{ WARNING turned off.
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child
a child riding in a forward-facing restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
child seat; an older child riding in a injured or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a
booster seat; and children, who are passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
large enough, using safety belts. because the back of the the right front seat, always move
If a child restraint is secured in the rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
right front passenger seat, and there be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
is a switch on the instrument panel airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
to manually turn off the right front child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
passenger airbag. See Airbag injured or killed if the right front
On-Off Switch on page 3‑33 and passenger airbag inflates and the When securing a child restraint in a
Securing Child Restraints (Rear passenger seat is in a forward rear seating position, study the
Seat Position) on page 3‑59 or position. instructions that came with the child
Securing Child Restraints (Front
(Continued) restraint to make sure it is
Seat-Passenger Sensing System)
compatible with this vehicle.
on page 3‑62 or Securing Child
Child restraints and booster seats Keep in mind that an unsecured a top tether, you must also use
vary considerably in size, and some child restraint can move around in a either the lower anchors or the
may fit in certain seating positions collision or sudden stop and injure safety belts to properly secure the
better than others. Always make people in the vehicle. Be sure to child restraint. A child restraint must
sure the child restraint is properly properly secure any child restraint in never be installed using only the top
secured. the vehicle — even when no child tether strap and anchor.
Depending on where you place the is in it. In order to use the LATCH system
child restraint and the size of the in your vehicle, you need a child
child restraint, you may not be able Lower Anchors and restraint that has LATCH
to access adjacent safety belt Tethers for Children attachments. The child restraint
assemblies or LATCH anchors for (LATCH System) manufacturer will provide you with
additional passengers or child instructions on how to use the child
restraints. Adjacent seating The LATCH system holds a child restraint and its attachments.
positions should not be used if the restraint during driving or in a crash. The following explains how to attach
child restraint prevents access to or This system is designed to make a child restraint with these
interferes with the routing of the installation of a child restraint easier. attachments in your vehicle.
safety belt. The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the Not all vehicle seating positions or
If the vehicle does not have a rear child restraint that are made for use child restraints have lower anchors
seat that will accommodate a with the LATCH system. and attachments or top tether
rear-facing child restraint, a anchors and attachments.
rear-facing child restraint should Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
not be installed in the vehicle, even child restraint is properly installed
if the airbag is off. using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
Wherever a child restraint is restraint, following the instructions
installed, be sure to secure the child that came with that restraint, and
restraint properly. also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the forward-facing child restraints have
built into the vehicle. There are two top of the child restraint to the a top tether, and that the tether be
lower anchors for each LATCH vehicle. A top tether anchor is built attached. Be sure to read and follow
seating position that will into the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Do not install three child restraints in
Anchor Locations the same row at the same time and
never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
Second, Third, and Fourth Row

with Three-Passenger
Second, Third, and Fourth Row Seat — Passenger Van
with Three-Passenger Seat There are two top tether anchors in
Front Passenger Position the second‐, third‐, and fourth-row
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating three-passenger seats. To install a
positions with top tether anchors. child restraint in the rear driver-side
j (Lower Anchor): Seating seating positions, use anchor
positions with two lower anchors. The second, third, and fourth row point (A). To install a child restraint
with three-passenger seats have in the rear passenger-side seating
See the information following for exposed metal lower anchors
installing a child restraint with a top positions, use anchor point (B).
located in the crease between the
tether in the second, third, and seatback and the seat cushion.
fourth row center positions.
To install a child restraint in the rear Do not secure a child restraint in a

center seating positions, use anchor position without a top tether anchor
point (B). Never install two top if a national or local law requires
tethers using the same top tether that the top tether be attached, or if
anchor. the instructions that come with the
If the vehicle is equipped with a child restraint say that the top tether
four-passenger fourth‐ or fifth-row must be attached.
seat, it does not have upper or According to accident statistics,
lower anchors. If a child restraint is children and infants are safer when
placed in the four-passenger fourth properly restrained in a child
or fifth-row seat, it must be secured restraint system or infant restraint
using the vehicle safety belts. system secured in a rear seating
See “Rear Seat Position” under Front Passenger Position position. See Where to Put the
Securing Child Restraints (Rear There is a top tether anchor for the Restraint on page 3‑51 for
Seat Position) on page 3‑59 or front passenger position with a front additional information.
Securing Child Restraints (Front passenger seat. The anchor is
Seat-Passenger Sensing System) located at the rear of the seat
on page 3‑62 or Securing Child cushion on the right front
Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off passenger seat.
Switch) on page 3‑65 for more
information.
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING { WARNING
System Do not attach more than one child Children can be seriously injured
restraint to a single anchor. or strangled if a shoulder belt is
{ WARNING Attaching more than one child wrapped around their neck and
restraint to a single anchor could the safety belt continues to
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment tighten. Buckle any unused safety
not attached to anchors, the child to come loose or even break belts behind the child restraint so
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others children cannot reach them. Pull
the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the the shoulder belt all the way out
child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries of the retractor to set the lock,
killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one if the vehicle has one, after the
restraint properly using the child restraint per anchor. child restraint has been installed.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that Notice: Do not let the LATCH
came with the child restraint and attachments rub against the
the instructions in this manual. vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat 2. If the child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route and tighten the top
with a safety belt buckled. This recommends that the top tether tether according to your
could damage the safety belt or be attached, attach and tighten child restraint instructions
the seat. Unbuckle and return the the top tether to the top tether and the following
safety belt to its stowed position, anchor, if equipped. Refer to the instructions:
before folding the seat. child restraint instructions and
1. Attach and tighten the lower the following steps:
attachments to the lower 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
anchors. If the child restraint 2.2. For the second, third,
does not have lower and fourth row with
attachments or the desired three-passenger seats only,
seating position does not have in the rear driver-side
lower anchors, secure the child seating positions, use
restraint with the top tether and anchor point (A). For the
the safety belts. Refer to your rear passenger-side seating
child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using
positions, use anchor does not have a headrest
instructions and the instructions point (B). For the center
in this manual. or head restraint and you
seating positions, use are using a single tether,
1.1. Find the lower anchors for anchor point (B). Never route the tether over the
the desired seating install two top tethers using seatback.
position. the same top tether anchor.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
If the position you are using

does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, If the position you are using If the position you are using
route the tether over the has an integrated headrest has an integrated headrest
seatback. or head restraint and you or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether, are using a single tether,
route the tether around the route the tether over the
headrest or head restraint. headrest or head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. There should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
Replacing LATCH System If the vehicle has the LATCH system Children (LATCH System) on
and it was being used during a page 3‑52 for top tether anchor
Parts After a Crash crash, new LATCH system parts locations.
may be needed. Do not secure a child seat in a
{ WARNING New parts and repairs may be position without a top tether anchor
A crash can damage the LATCH necessary even if the LATCH if a national or local law requires
system in the vehicle. A damaged system was not being used at the that the top tether be anchored, or if
LATCH system may not properly time of the crash. the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
secure the child restraint,
resulting in serious injury or even Securing Child Restraints must be anchored.
death in a crash. To help make (Rear Seat Position) In Canada, the law requires that
sure the LATCH system is forward-facing child restraints have
When securing a child restraint in a
working properly after a crash, a top tether, and that the tether be
rear seating position, study the
see your dealer to have the attached.
instructions that came with the child
system inspected and any restraint to make sure it is If the child restraint does not have
necessary replacements made as compatible with this vehicle. the LATCH system, you will be
soon as possible. using the safety belt to secure the
If the child restraint has the LATCH
child restraint in this position.
system, see Lower Anchors and
Be sure to follow the instructions
Tethers for Children (LATCH
that came with the child restraint.
System) on page 3‑52 for how and
Secure the child in the child restraint
where to install the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
If more than one child restraint

needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑51.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor.
necessary.
Try to pull the belt out of the 7. Before placing a child in the
retractor to make sure the child restraint, make sure it is
retractor is locked. If the securely held in place. To check,
retractor is not locked, repeat grasp the child restraint at the
Steps 4 and 5. safety belt path and attempt to
6. If the child restraint has a top move it side‐to‐side and
tether, follow the child restraint back‐and‐forth. When the child
manufacturer's instructions restraint is properly installed,
regarding the use of the top there should be no more than
tether. See Lower Anchors and 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Tethers for Children (LATCH To remove the child restraint,
System) on page 3‑52 for more unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
5. To tighten the belt, push down information. let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the If the top tether is attached to a top
shoulder portion of the belt to tether anchor, disconnect it.
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Securing Child Restraints A label on the sun visor says,

WARNING (Continued)
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
(Front Seat-Passenger the front.” This is because the risk to Even if the passenger sensing
Sensing System) the rear-facing child is so great, system has turned off the right
This vehicle has airbags. A rear if the airbag deploys. front passenger frontal airbag, no
seat is a safer place to secure a system is fail-safe. No one can
forward-facing child restraint. See { WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not
Where to Put the Restraint on deploy under some unusual
page 3‑51. A child in a rear-facing child
circumstance, even though it is
restraint can be seriously
On vehicles with a passenger turned off.
injured or killed if the right front
sensing system, the system is passenger airbag inflates. Secure rear-facing child
designed to turn off the right front restraints in a rear seat, even if
This is because the back of the
passenger frontal airbag under
rear-facing child restraint would the airbag is off. If you secure a
certain conditions. See Passenger
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in
Sensing System on page 3‑37 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move
on page 5‑19 for more information, child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far
including important safety injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to
information. passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat.
position. See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) on page 3‑37 for additional
information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear In Canada, the law requires that 2. Put the child restraint on
seat that will accommodate a forward-facing child restraints have the seat.
rear-facing child restraint, a a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
rear-facing child restraint should attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
not be installed in the vehicle, even You will be using the lap-shoulder the vehicle's safety belt through
if the airbag is off. belt to secure the child restraint in or around the restraint. The child
If the child restraint has the LATCH this position. Follow the instructions restraint instructions will show
system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint. you how.
Tethers for Children (LATCH 1. Move the seat as far back as it
System) on page 3‑52 for how and will go before securing the
where to install the child restraint forward-facing child restraint.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it When the passenger sensing
uses a top tether, see Lower system has turned off the right
Anchors and Tethers for Children front passenger frontal airbag,
(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for the off indicator on the
top tether anchor locations. passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit
Do not secure a child seat in a when the vehicle is started. See
position without a top tether anchor Passenger Airbag Status
if a national or local law requires Indicator on page 5‑19.
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled if not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
necessary. into the retractor. When installing
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a If the airbag is off, the off indicator Securing Child Restraints
rear seat and the child restraint in the passenger airbag status
has a top tether, follow the indicator will come on and stay on
(Front Seat-Airbag On/Off
child restraint manufacturer's when the vehicle is started. Switch)
instructions regarding the use of If the child restraint has been This vehicle has airbags. A rear
the top tether. See Lower installed and the on indicator is lit, seat is a safer place to secure a
Anchors and Tethers for see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a forward-facing child restraint. See
Children (LATCH System) on Child Restraint” under Passenger Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑52 for more information. Sensing System on page 3‑37 for page 3‑51.
8. Before placing a child in the more information. On vehicles with an airbag on/off
child restraint, make sure it is To remove the child restraint, switch, you can use this feature to
securely held in place. To check, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and turn off the right front passenger
grasp the child restraint at the let it return to the stowed position. frontal airbag. The switch is located
safety belt path and attempt to on the instrument panel. See Airbag
move it side to side and back If the top tether is attached to a top
On-Off Switch on page 3‑33 for
and forth. When the child tether anchor, disconnect it.
more information, including
restraint is properly installed, important safety information.
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
A label on the sun visor says,

“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
the front.” This is because the risk to
Even if the airbag switch has If the airbag readiness light ever
the rear-facing child is so great,
turned off the right front comes on and stays on, it means
if the airbag deploys.
passenger frontal airbag, no that something may be wrong
system is fail-safe. No one can with the airbag system. For
{ WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not example, the right front
A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual passenger airbag could inflate
restraint can be seriously injured circumstance, even though it is even though the airbag on-off
or killed if the right front turned off. switch is turned off.
passenger airbag inflates. This is Secure rear-facing child To help avoid injury to yourself or
because the back of the restraints in a rear seat, even if others, have the vehicle serviced
rear-facing child restraint would the airbag is off. If you secure a right away. See Airbag Readiness
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in Light on page 5‑16 for more
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move information, including important
child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far safety information.
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to
passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat.
position.
(Continued)
If the vehicle does not have a rear Do not secure a child seat in a When the airbag off switch
seat that will accommodate a position without a top tether anchor has turned off the right front
rear-facing child restraint, a if a national or local law requires passenger frontal airbag, the off
rear-facing child restraint should not that the top tether be anchored, or if indicator in the airbag off light
be installed in the vehicle, even if the instructions that come with the should light and stay lit when the
the airbag is off. child restraint say that the top strap vehicle is started. See Airbag
If the child restraint has the LATCH must be anchored. On-Off Light on page 5‑17.
system, see Lower Anchors and In Canada, the law requires that 2. Put the child restraint on
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraints have the seat.
System) on page 3‑52 for how and a top tether, and that the tether be 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
where to install the child restraint attached. the lap and shoulder portions of
using LATCH. If a child restraint is You will be using the lap-shoulder the vehicle safety belt through or
secured using a safety belt and it belt to secure the child restraint in around the restraint. The child
uses a top tether, see Lower this position. Follow the instructions restraint instructions will show
Anchors and Tethers for Children that came with the child restraint. you how.
(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 for
top tether anchor locations. 1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but
to install a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
restraint has been installed.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
the buckle so that the safety belt set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
if necessary. into the retractor. When installing
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a To remove the child restraint,

rear seat and the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
has a top tether, follow the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint manufacturer's If the top tether is attached to a top
instructions regarding the use of tether anchor, disconnect it.
the top tether. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for If you turned the airbag off with the
Children (LATCH System) on switch, turn on the right front
page 3‑52 for more information. passenger airbag when you remove
the child restraint from the vehicle
8. Before placing a child in the unless the person who will be sitting
child restraint, make sure it is there is a member of a passenger
securely held in place. To check, airbag risk group. See Airbag
grasp the child restraint at the On-Off Switch on page 3‑33 for
safety belt path and attempt to more information, including
move it side to side and back important safety information.
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Front Storage
This vehicle may have a front
storage compartment. It is located at
the center of the instrument panel
extension, by the floor. To open the
compartment, pull up on the latch.
The compartment will open
automatically.
Storage compartments may also be
included on the inside of each
front door.
4-2 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Oil Pressure

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Controls Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Engine Cooling System
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Passenger Airbag Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Malfunction Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Brake System Warning Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Ride Control System
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37
Indicators Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 Anti-theft Alarm System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-24 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Vehicle Reminder
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Information Displays Vehicle Personalization
Driver Information Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel w or c / x (Next/Previous):

while driving. Press to select preset or favorite
Steering Wheel radio stations, select tracks on a
Steering Wheel Controls CD, or navigate an iPod® or USB
Adjustment device.
Radio
To select preset or favorite radio
stations:
Press and release w or c / x to
go to the next or previous radio
station stored as a preset or
favorite.
CD
To select tracks on a CD:
If available, some audio controls Press and release w or c / x to

For vehicles with a tilt steering can be adjusted at the steering go to the next or previous track.
wheel, the lever is located on the wheel.
left side of the steering column.
See Cruise Control on page 9‑39 for
To adjust the steering wheel: more information on other steering
1. Pull the lever to move the wheel control.
steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
2. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or 3. Press and release w or c / x SRCE (Source/Voice

USB Device to scroll up or down the list. Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio and CD, and for
1. Press and hold w or c / x . To select a folder, press equipped vehicles, the front
while listening to a song until the and hold w, or press ¨ auxiliary.
contents of the current folder when the folder is
display on the radio display. ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
highlighted. radio station while in AM,
2. Press and release w or c / x . To go back further in the FM, or XM™.
to scroll up or down the list, then folder list, press and hold For vehicles with a CD Player or
press and hold w, or press ¨ to c / x. USB port:
play the highlighted track. b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press
to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
Navigating Folders on an iPod or chapter while sourced to the CD.
USB Device Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
1. Press and hold w or c / x OnStar® systems, press and hold when navigating folders on an iPod
while listening to a song until the for longer than two seconds to or USB device.
contents of the current folder interact with those systems. See
display on the radio display. While listening to a CD, press and
Bluetooth on page 7‑23 and the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more hold ¨ to quickly move forward
2. Press and hold c / x to go through the tracks. Release to stop
back to the previous folder list. information.
on the desired track.
c / x (End): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call. + e − e (Volume): Press to
increase or to decrease the volume.
Horn 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Use Windshield Washer

to adjust the delay time between The windshield wiper paddle is
Press the horn symbol in the middle
wipes. Turn the band up for more located on top of the multifunction
of the steering wheel to sound
frequent wipes or down for less lever.
the horn.
frequent wipes.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the
Windshield Wiper/Washer d (Low Speed): Slow wipes. paddle to spray washer fluid on the
a (High Speed): Fast wipes. windshield. The wipers will clear the
window and then either stop or
9 (Off): Use to turn the return to the preset speed.
wipers off.
When driving during the day and the
wipers are activated, the head
{ WARNING
lamps automatically turn on after In freezing weather, do not use
completing eight wipe cycles. the washer until the windshield is
The windshield wiper control is
located on the multifunction lever on Clear ice and snow from the wiper warmed. Otherwise the washer
the left side of the steering wheel. blades before using them. If frozen fluid can form ice on the
to the windshield, carefully loosen or windshield, blocking your vision.
Turn the band with N on it to select thaw them. Damaged blades should
the wiper speed. be replaced.
8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe.
Hold the band on z, then release.
For several wipes, hold the band on
z longer.
Compass To adjust for compass variance, use

the following procedure:
This vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
Compass Zone
1. Do not set the compass zone
Your dealer will set the correct zone when the vehicle is moving. Only
for your location. set it when the vehicle is in
Under certain circumstances, P (Park).
such as during a long distance
Press T until PRESS V TO
cross-country trip or moving to a
new state or province, it will be CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
necessary to compensate for displays.
2. Find the vehicle's current
compass variance by resetting the
location and variance zone
zone through the DIC if the zone is number on the map.
not set correctly.
Zones 1 through 15 are
Compass variance is the difference available.
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the 3. Press V to scroll through and
compass is not set to the zone select the appropriate
where you live, the compass may variance zone.
give false readings. The compass
must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
4. Press 3 until the vehicle the compass. Such interference 2. Press T until PRESS V TO
heading, for example, N for may be caused by a magnetic CB or CALIBRATE COMPASS
North, is displayed in the DIC. cell phone antenna mount, a displays.
magnetic emergency light, magnetic
5. If calibration is necessary, note pad holder, or any other 3. Press V to start the compass
calibrate the compass. See magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, calibration.
“Compass Calibration move the magnetic item, then turn
Procedure” following. 4. The DIC will display
on the vehicle and calibrate the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
Compass Calibration compass.
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in
The compass can be manually To calibrate the compass, use the tight circles at less than 8 km/h
calibrated. Only calibrate the following procedure: (5 mph) to complete the
compass in a magnetically clean calibration. The DIC will display
Compass Calibration Procedure
and safe location, such as an open CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
parking lot, where driving the 1. Before calibrating the compass, few seconds when the
vehicle in circles is not a danger. make sure the compass zone is calibration is complete. The DIC
It is suggested to calibrate away set to the variance zone in which display will then return to
from tall buildings, utility wires, the vehicle is located. See PRESS V TO CALIBRATE
manhole covers, or other industrial “Compass Variance (Zone) COMPASS.
structures, if possible. Procedure” earlier in this
section.
If CAL should ever appear in the
DIC display, the compass should be Do not operate any switches
calibrated. such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc.
If the DIC display does not show a during the calibration procedure.
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with
Clock 2. While either the hour or the To set the time and date, follow the
minutes are flashing, turn the instructions:
AM/FM Radio with Optional CD f knob, located on the upper
Player right side of the radio, clockwise 1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
or counterclockwise to increase DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,
If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio day, and year) displays.
or decrease the time. While the
with an optional CD player, it has a
12HR or 24HR time format is 2. Press the softkey located under
H button for setting the time. With
these types of radios, the clock can flashing, turn the f knob any one of the tabs that you
be set with either the radio turned clockwise or counterclockwise to want to change. Every time the
on or off. select the default time settings. softkey is pressed again, the
time or the date if selected,
Set the time by following these 3. Press H again until the clock increases by one.
steps: display stops flashing to set the
currently displayed time; Another way to increase the time
1. Press H until the hour begins otherwise, the flashing stops or date, is to press ¨ SEEK or
flashing on display. Press this after five seconds and the \ FWD (forward).
button a second time and the current time displayed is
minutes begin flashing on 3. To decrease, press © SEEK or
automatically set.
display. s REV. You can also turn the
MP3 Radio with a Single CD f knob, located on the upper
Press H a third time and the right side of the radio, to adjust
Player
12HR or 24HR time format the selected setting.
begins flashing. If the vehicle has a radio with a
single CD (MP3) player, the radio
has a H button for setting the time
and date.
Changing the Time and Date MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD 3. To decrease, press © SEEK or
Default Settings Player s REV, or turn the f knob,
You can change the time default If the vehicle has a radio with a located on the upper right side of
setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or six-disc CD player, the radio has a the radio, to adjust the selected
change the date default setting from setting.
MENU button instead of H to set
month/day/year to day/month/year.
the time and date. Changing the Time and Date
To change the time or date default Default Settings
To set the time and date, follow
settings, follow these instructions:
these instructions: To change the time default setting
1. Press H and then the softkey 1. Press the MENU button. Once from 12 hours to 24 hours or change
located under the forward arrow the date default setting from month/
the H option displays, press the
that is currently displayed on the day/year to day/month/year.
softkey located under that tab.
radio screen until the time To change the time or date default
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY
12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and settings, follow these instructions:
(hour, minute, month, day, and
the date MM/DD (month and
year) displays. 1. Press the MENU button. Once
day) and DD/MM (day and
month) are displayed. 2. Press the softkey located under the H option displays, press the
any one of the tabs to change. softkey located under the
2. Press the softkey located under
Every time the softkey is forward arrow that is currently
the desired option.
pressed again, the time or the displayed on the radio screen
3. Press H again to apply the date if selected, increases until the 12H (hour) and
selected default, or let the by one. 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD
screen time out. Another way to increase the time (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
or date, is to press ¨ SEEK or
\ FWD (forward).
2. Press the softkey located under Notice: Hanging heavy

the desired option. { WARNING equipment from the power outlet
3. Press the MENU button again to can cause damage not covered
Power is always supplied to the by the vehicle warranty. The
apply the selected default, or let outlets. Do not leave electrical
the screen time out. power outlets are designed for
equipment plugged in when the accessory power plugs only, such
vehicle is not in use because the as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlets vehicle could catch fire and cause
The accessory power outlets can be injury or death. Cigarette Lighter
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or an MP3 To use the cigarette lighter, if the
Notice: Leaving electrical vehicle has one, push it in all the
player. equipment plugged in for an way, and let go. When it is ready for
The vehicle may have two extended period of time while the use, it will pop back out by itself.
accessory power outlets located on vehicle is off will drain the
the instrument panel. battery. Always unplug electrical Do not use the lighter to plug in
equipment when not in use and accessory devices. Use the power
Remove the cover to access and do not plug in equipment that outlets provided.
replace when not in use. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
Certain power accessory plugs may rating. in while it is heating does not let
not be compatible to the accessory When adding electrical equipment, the lighter back away from the
power outlet and could overload be sure to follow the proper heating element when it is hot.
vehicle or adapter fuses. If a installation instructions included with Damage from overheating can
problem is experienced, see your the equipment. See Add-On occur to the lighter or heating
dealer. Electrical Equipment on page 9‑59. element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Ashtrays Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
For vehicles with an ashtray it is Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
located in the center console or on lights work together to indicate a
the instrument panel. Pull up on the Indicators problem with the vehicle.
ashtray door to open it if it is in the Warning lights and gauges can
console or pull the door open it if it When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
is on the instrument panel. before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
Notice: If papers, pins, or other to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
flammable items are put in the replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
smoking materials could ignite prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
them and possibly damage the Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
vehicle. Never put flammable could be a problem with a vehicle
items in the ashtray. function. Some warning lights come
To remove the ashtray, pull it out on briefly when the engine is started
from the console or from the slide to indicate they are working.
out door. To reinstall the ashtray,
slide it back to the original position.
Instrument Cluster
English 4‐Speed Version Shown, 6‐Speed and Metric Similar

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Trip Odometer Fuel Gauge

see the Duramax diesel supplement
for more information. The trip odometer can show how far
the vehicle has been driven since
Speedometer the trip odometer was last set
to zero.
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed in both kilometers per hour Press the 3 on the Driver
(km/h) and miles per hour (mph). Information Center (DIC) switch to
display the trip odometer and the
Odometer regular odometer information.
The odometer shows how far the See Driver Information Center (DIC)
vehicle has been driven, in either on page 5‑27 for more information
miles or kilometers. on resetting the trip odometer.
To display the odometer reading Metric
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
odometer. The digital odometer will with the ignition off, press the
read 999,999 if it is turned back. 3 on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) switch.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, it must be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it must
be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Listed are four situations customers Engine Oil Pressure

might experience with the fuel
gauge. None of these indicate a
Gauge
problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
English
took a little more or less than
The fuel gauge, when the ignition is half the tank's capacity to fill
on, indicates how much fuel is left in the tank.
Metric
the vehicle fuel tank. . The gauge moves a little while
An arrow on the fuel gauge turning a corner or speeding up.
indicates the side of the vehicle the . The gauge does not go back to
fuel door is on.
empty when the ignition is
The gauge first indicates empty turned off.
before the vehicle is out of fuel, and
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
the fuel tank should be
refueled soon.
for more information.
A reading in the low pressure zone Engine Coolant

may be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or other problem
Temperature Gauge
causing low oil pressure. Check the
oil as soon as possible.
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
English the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure gauge shows the
engine oil pressure in psi (pounds
Metric
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals) Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
when the engine is running. maintenance can damage the
Oil pressure may vary with engine engine. The repairs would not be
speed, outside temperature and oil covered by the vehicle warranty.
viscosity, but readings above the Always follow the maintenance
low pressure zone indicate the schedule for changing engine oil.
normal operating range.
See Engine Overheating on Readings in the low warning zone

page 10‑24. may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
Voltmeter Gauge in the vehicle and the engine is left
at an idle for an extended period.
This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to
provide full power at engine idle. As
engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as
higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
English power.
This gauge shows the engine The vehicle can be only driven for a
coolant temperature. short time with the reading in either
warning zone. If it must be driven,
It also provides an indicator of how turn off all unnecessary
hard the vehicle is working. During a accessories.
majority of the operation, the gauge When the engine is not running, but
wil read 100°C (210°F) or less. If the the ignition is on, this gauge shows Readings in either warning zone
vehicle is pulling a load or going up the battery's state of charge in indicate a possible problem in the
hills, it is normal for the temperature DC volts. electrical system. Have the vehicle
to fluctuate and approach the 122°C When the engine is running, the serviced as soon as possible.
(250°F) mark. If the gauge reaches gauge shows the condition of the
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates charging system. Readings between
that the cooling system is working the low and high warning zones
beyond its capacity. indicate the normal operating range.
Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt The passenger safety belt reminder
Reminder Light light and chime may turn on if an
Driver Safety Belt Reminder object is put on the seat such as a
Light briefcase, handbag, grocery bag,
laptop, or other electronic device. To
There is a driver safety belt
turn off the reminder light and/or
reminder light on the instrument
chime, remove the object from the
panel cluster.
seat or buckle the safety belt.
For vehicles equipped with the Airbag Readiness Light

passenger safety belt reminder The system checks the airbag's
light, several seconds after the electrical system for possible
engine is started, a chime sounds malfunctions. If the light stays on it
for several seconds to remind the indicates there is an electrical
When the vehicle is started, this front passenger to buckle their problem. The system check
light flashes and a chime may come safety belt. The passenger safety includes the airbag sensor, the
on to remind the driver to fasten belt light flashes and then stays on pretensioners, the airbag modules,
their safety belt. Then the light solid until the belt is buckled. This the wiring and the crash sensing
stays on solid until the belt is cycle continues several times if the and diagnostic module. For more
buckled. This cycle may continue passenger remains or becomes information on the airbag system,
several times if the driver remains or unbuckled while the vehicle is see Airbag System on page 3‑25.
becomes unbuckled while the moving.
vehicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is
If the driver safety belt is buckled, buckled, neither the chime nor the
neither the light nor the chime light comes on.
comes on.
For vehicles with a remote start, the Airbag On-Off Light

airbag readiness light will stay on
until the driver places the ignition When the right front passenger
switch to the ON/RUN position. airbag is manually turned off using
the airbag on-off switch on the
If there is a problem with the airbag instrument panel, if equipped, the
system, an airbag Driver Information indicator light OFF or the off symbol
The airbag readiness light flashes Center (DIC) message can also will come on and stay on as a
for a few seconds when the engine come on. See Airbag System reminder that the airbag has been
is started. If the light does not come Messages on page 5‑37 for more turned off. This light will go off when
on then, have it fixed immediately. information. the airbag has been turned on. See
Airbag On-Off Switch on page 3‑33
{ WARNING for more information, including
important safety information.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
{ WARNING { WARNING
If the right front passenger airbag If the airbag readiness light ever
is turned off for a person who is comes on and stays on, it means
not in a risk group identified by that something may be wrong
the national government, that with the airbag system. For
person will not have the extra example, the right front
protection of an airbag. In a passenger airbag could inflate
crash, the airbag will not be able even though the airbag on-off
to inflate and help protect the switch is turned off.
person sitting there. To help avoid injury to yourself or
United States Do not turn off the passenger others, have the vehicle serviced
airbag unless the person sitting right away. See Airbag Readiness
there is in a risk group identified Light on page 5‑16 for more
by the national government. See information, including important
Airbag On-Off Switch on safety information.
page 3‑33 for more on this,
including important safety If the word ON or the on symbol is
information. lit, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled,
and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off
Switch on page 3‑33 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Canada and Mexico
Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both status
passenger airbag status indicator indicator lights remain on, or if there
Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol are no lights at all, there may be a
If the vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds problem with the lights or the
sensing system, the instrument as a system check. If you are using passenger sensing system. See
panel will have a passenger airbag remote start, if equipped, to start the your dealer for service.
status indicator. See Passenger vehicle from a distance, you may
Sensing System on page 3‑37 for
important safety information.
not see the system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the
{ WARNING
status indicator will light either ON If the airbag readiness light ever
or OFF, or either the on or off comes on and stays on, it means
symbol to let you know the status of that something may be wrong
the right front passenger frontal with the airbag system. To help
airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others,
If the word ON or the on symbol is have the vehicle serviced right
United States lit on the passenger airbag status away. See Airbag Readiness
indicator, it means that the right Light on page 5‑16 for more
front passenger frontal airbag is information, including important
enabled, and may inflate. safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front
Canada and Mexico passenger frontal airbag.
Charging System Light information. This light could indicate

that there are problems with a
generator drive belt, or that there is
an electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, This light should come on when the
such as the radio and air ignition is on, but the engine is not
conditioner. running, as a check to show it is
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to START, but working. If it does not, have the
the engine is not running, as a
Malfunction vehicle serviced by your dealer.
check to show it is working. Indicator Lamp If the malfunction indicator lamp
If it does not, have the vehicle A computer system called OBD II comes on and stays on while the
serviced by your dealer. (On-Board Diagnostics-Second engine is running, this indicates that
Generation) monitors operation of there is an OBD II problem and
The light should go out once the the fuel, ignition, and emission service is required.
engine starts. If it stays on, control systems. It ensures that
or comes on while driving, there Malfunctions often are indicated by
emissions are at acceptable levels the system before any problem is
could be a problem with the for the life of the vehicle, helping to
charging system. A charging system apparent. Being aware of the light
produce a cleaner environment. can prevent more serious damage
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can also appear. See to the vehicle. This system assists
Battery Voltage and Charging the service technician in correctly
Messages on page 5‑32 for more diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission
continually driven with this light malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has
on, the emission controls might Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
not work as well, the vehicle fuel has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might be
economy might not be as good, increases vehicle emissions and required.
and the engine might not run as could damage the emission control The following may correct an
smoothly. This could lead to system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emissions system malfunction:
costly repairs that might not be and service might be required.
covered by the vehicle warranty. . Make sure the fuel cap is fully
To prevent more serious damage to installed. See Filling the Tank on
Notice: Modifications made the vehicle: page 9‑46. The diagnostic
to the engine, transmission, system can determine if the fuel
exhaust, intake, or fuel system . Reduce vehicle speed.
cap has been left off or
of the vehicle or the replacement . Avoid hard accelerations. improperly installed. A loose or
of the original tires with other missing fuel cap allows fuel to
than those of the same Tire
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
evaporate into the atmosphere.
Performance Criteria (TPC) can . If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap
affect the vehicle's emission amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn the
controls and can cause this light soon as it is possible. light off.
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to If the light continues to flash, when . Make sure the electrical system
costly repairs not covered by the it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. is not wet. The system could be
vehicle warranty. This could also Find a safe place to park the wet if the vehicle was driven
result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at through a deep puddle of water.
required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the The condition is usually
Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, corrected when the electrical
Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see system dries out. A few driving
page 10‑3. your dealer for service as soon as trips should turn the light off.
possible.

. Make sure to fuel the vehicle Emissions Inspection and The vehicle may not pass
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs inspection if:
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can Some state/provincial and local . The malfunction indicator lamp is
cause: stalling after start-up, governments may have programs on with the engine running, or if
stalling when the vehicle is to inspect the on-vehicle emission the light does not come on when
changed into gear, misfiring, control equipment. For the the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
hesitation on acceleration, inspection, the emission system while the engine is off.
or stumbling on acceleration. test equipment is connected to the . The critical emission control
These conditions might go away vehicle’s Data Link systems have not been
once the engine is warmed up. Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed by the
If one or more of these conditions system. This can happen if the
occurs, change the fuel brand used. battery has recently been
It will require at least one full tank of replaced or if the battery has run
the proper fuel to turn the light off. down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission
See Recommended Fuel on control systems during normal
page 9‑42. driving. This can take
If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the
the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
proper test equipment and is needed. inspection, your dealer can
diagnostic tools to fix any prepare the vehicle for
mechanical or electrical problems inspection.
that might have developed.
Brake System Warning When the ignition is on, the brake

Light system warning light also comes on { WARNING
when the parking brake is set. See
The vehicle brake system consists Parking Brake on page 9‑36 for The brake system might not be
of two hydraulic circuits. If one more information. The light stays on working properly if the brake
circuit is not working, the remaining if the parking brake does not fully system warning light is on.
circuit can still work to stop the release. If it stays on after the Driving with the brake system
vehicle. For normal braking parking brake is fully released, it warning light on can lead to a
performance, both circuits need to means the vehicle has a brake crash. If the light is still on after
be working. problem. the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
If the warning light comes on, there If the light comes on while driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully. have the vehicle towed for
could be a brake problem. Have the
brake system inspected right away. The pedal might be harder to push, service.
or the pedal might go closer to the
floor. It could take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
Metric English
This light should come on briefly

when ignition key is turned to ON/
RUN. If it does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning StabiliTrak® Indicator
light is also on, the vehicle does not
(ABS) Warning Light have antilock brakes and there is a
Light
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑23.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake For vehicles with the StabiliTrak®
System (ABS), this light comes on system, this light comes on or
briefly when the engine is started. flashes.
If it does not, have the vehicle For more information, see
serviced by your dealer. If the StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.
system is working normally the For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Three chimes sound if the light turns
indicator light then goes off. Mode feature, this light comes on on and one chime if the light
If the ABS light stays on, turn the when the Tow/Haul Mode has been turns off.
ignition off. If the light comes on activated.
If this light remains on steady, the
while driving, stop as soon as it is For more information, see Tow/Haul vehicle needs to be taken in for
safely possible and turn the ignition Mode on page 9‑34. service.
off. Then start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and

WARNING (Continued)
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a Someone could be burned. Check
problem with the TPMS. The light the oil as soon as possible and
flashes for about a minute and stays have the vehicle serviced.
on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
See Tire Pressure Monitor maintenance can damage the
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Operation on page 10‑59 for more engine. The repairs would not be
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
information. covered by the vehicle warranty.
comes on briefly when the engine is
Always follow the maintenance
started. It provides information
Engine Oil Pressure Light schedule for changing engine oil.
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
This light comes on briefly while
When the Light is On Steady starting the engine. If it does not,
This indicates that one or more of have the vehicle serviced by your
the tires are significantly dealer. If the system is working
underinflated. normally, the indicator light then
A tire pressure message can goes off.
accompany the light. See Tire If the light comes on and stays on, it
Messages on page 5‑38 for more means that oil is not flowing through
information. Stop as soon as
{ WARNING the engine properly. The vehicle
possible, and inflate the tires to the Do not keep driving if the oil could be low on oil and it might
pressure value shown on the Tire pressure is low. The engine can have some other system problem.
and Loading Information label. See become so hot that it catches fire.
Tire Pressure on page 10‑57 for
more information. (Continued)
Security Light High-Beam On Light Cruise Control Light
This light should could come on This light comes on when the The cruise control light comes on
briefly when the vehicle is started high-beam headlamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set.
and then it goes out. If it does not, See Headlamp High/Low-Beam The light goes out when the cruise
see your dealer for service. Changer on page 6‑2 for more control is turned off. See Cruise
For information regarding this light information. Control on page 9‑39 for more
and the vehicle's security system, information.
see Immobilizer Operation on
page 2‑12.
Information Displays and fuel information. The compass

direction appears on the top
DIC Buttons
right corner of the DIC display.

Driver Information The outside air temperature
Center (DIC) automatically appears in the bottom
right corner of the DIC display.
This vehicle has a Driver
If there is a problem with the system
Information Center (DIC).
that controls the temperature
All messages will appear in the DIC display, the numbers will be
display located at the bottom of the replaced with dashes. If this occurs,
instrument panel cluster. The DIC have the vehicle serviced by your
buttons are located on the dealer.
instrument panel, next to the
instrument panel cluster.
see the Duramax® diesel
The DIC comes on when the ignition supplement for more information. The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
is on. After a short delay, the DIC information, customization, and set/
will display the information that was DIC Operation and Displays reset buttons. The button functions
last displayed before the engine The DIC has different displays are detailed in the following pages.
was turned off. which can be accessed by pressing 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and the DIC buttons located on the to display the odometer, trip
vehicle system information, and instrument panel, next to the odometers, fuel range, average
warning messages if a system instrument panel cluster. economy, fuel used, timer, average
problem is detected. speed, and digital tachometer.
If the vehicle has these features, the
DIC also displays the compass
direction and the outside air
temperature when viewing the trip
T (Vehicle Information): Press Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer has a feature
this button to display the oil life, called the retro-active reset. This
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
can be used to set the trip odometer
units, tire pressure readings for to scroll through the following menu
vehicles with the Tire Pressure to the number of kilometers (miles)
items:
Monitor System (TPMS), engine driven since the ignition was last
hours, Tire Pressure Monitor Odometer turned on. This can be used if the
System (TPMS) programming for trip odometer is not reset at the
Press 3 until XX km (mi) beginning of the trip.
vehicles with the TPMS and without
a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) displays. This display shows the
distance the vehicle has been To use the retro-active reset feature,
transmitter, and compass zone and press and hold V for at least
compass calibration on vehicles driven in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi). four seconds. The trip odometer
with this feature.
will display the number of
U (Customization): Press this Trip Odometers kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
button to customize the feature Press 3 until A or B displays. since the ignition was last turned on
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle This display shows the current and the vehicle was moving. Once
Personalization on page 5‑40 for distance traveled in either the vehicle begins moving, the trip
more information. kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since odometer will accumulate mileage.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to the last reset for each trip odometer. For example, if the vehicle was
set or reset certain functions and to Both trip odometers can be used at driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
turn off or acknowledge messages the same time. started again, and then the
on the DIC. retro-active reset feature is
Each trip odometer can be reset to activated, the display will show 8 km
zero separately by pressing V while (5 miles). As the vehicle begins
the desired trip odometer is moving, the display will then
displayed. increase to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),
8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is fuel tank. This is because different Fuel Used
activated after the vehicle is started, driving conditions produce different
but before it begins moving, the fuel economies. Generally, freeway Press 3 until FUEL USED
display will show the number of driving produces better fuel displays. This display shows the
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that economy than city driving. number of liters (L) or gallons (gal)
were driven during the last ignition of fuel used since the last reset of
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the this menu item. To reset the fuel
cycle. FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be
used information, press and hold V
Fuel Range displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”
under Fuel System Messages on while FUEL USED is displayed.
Press 3 until FUEL RANGE page 5‑35 for more information. Timer
displays. This display shows the
approximate number of remaining Average Economy Press 3 until TIMER displays.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the Press 3 until AVG ECONOMY This display can be used as a timer.
vehicle can be driven without displays. This display shows the
refueling. The display will show To start the timer, press V while
approximate average liters per TIMER is displayed. The display will
LOW if the fuel level is low. 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles show the amount of time that has
The fuel range estimate is based on per gallon (mpg). This number is passed since the timer was last
an average of the fuel economy calculated based on the number of reset, not including time the ignition
over recent driving history and the L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the is off. Time will continue to be
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel last time this menu item was reset. counted as long as the ignition is
tank. This estimate will change if To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and on, even if another display is being
driving conditions change. For hold V. The display will return shown on the DIC. The timer will
example, if driving in traffic and to zero. record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
making frequent stops, this display and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after
may read one number, but if the which the display will return to zero.
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though To stop the timer, press V briefly
the same amount of fuel is in the while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and Vehicle Information Menu When the remaining oil life is low,
hold V while TIMER is displayed. Items the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will appear on the display.
Average Speed T (Vehicle Information): Press See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
this button to scroll through the under Engine Oil Messages on
Press 3 until AVERAGE SPEED following menu items: page 5‑34. You should change the
displays. This display shows the oil as soon as possible. See Engine
average speed of the vehicle in Oil Life
Oil on page 10‑7. In addition to the
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles Press T until OIL LIFE engine oil life system monitoring the
per hour (mph). This average is REMAINING displays. This display oil life, additional maintenance is
calculated based on the various shows an estimate of the oil's recommended in the Maintenance
vehicle speeds recorded since the remaining useful life. If you see Schedule in this manual. See
last reset of this value. To reset the 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the Scheduled Maintenance on
value, press and hold V. The display, that means 99% of the page 11‑3 for more information.
display will return to zero. current oil life remains. The engine
Remember, you must reset the OIL
oil life system will alert you to
Digital Tachometer LIFE yourself after each oil change.
change the oil on a schedule
It will not reset itself. Also, be
Press 3 until consistent with your driving
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
Tachometer ##00 RPM displays. conditions.
accidentally at any time other than
This display shows the engine when the oil has just been changed.
speed in revolutions per It cannot be reset accurately until
minute (RPM). the next oil change. To reset the
Blank Display engine oil life system, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑11.
This display shows no information.
Units Pressure on page 5‑38 and Tire Rotation on page 5‑38 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑38 for more Messages on page 5‑38 for more
Press T until UNITS displays. information. information.
This display allows you to select
between metric or English units of If the tire pressure display shows Change Compass Zone
measurement. Once in this display, dashes instead of a value, there
may be a problem with the vehicle. The vehicle may have this feature.
press V to select between METRIC To change the compass zone
If this consistently occurs, see your
or ENGLISH units. dealer for service. through the DIC, see Compass on
page 5‑5.
Tire Pressure Engine Hours
Calibrate Compass
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), the Press T until ENGINE HOURS The vehicle may have this feature.
pressure for each tire can be viewed displays. This display shows the The compass can be manually
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be total number of hours the engine calibrated. To calibrate the compass
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or has run. through the DIC, see Compass on
pounds per square inch (psi). Press Relearn Tire Positions page 5‑5.
T until the DIC displays FRONT Blank Display
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## The vehicle may have this display.
To access this display, the vehicle This display shows no information.
RIGHT ##. Press T again until the
must be in P (Park). If the vehicle
DIC displays REAR TIRES has the Tire Pressure Monitor
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. System (TPMS), after rotating the
If a low tire pressure condition is tires or after replacing a tire or
detected by the system while sensor, the system must re-learn the
driving, a message advising you to tire positions. To re-learn the tire
check the pressure in a specific tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor
will appear in the display. See Tire System on page 10‑58. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑63, Tire
Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages on the DIC display. If the message
indicate the status of the vehicle or SERVICE BATTERY is still displayed or appears again
some action may be needed to CHARGING SYSTEM when you begin driving, the brake
correct a condition. Multiple system needs service as soon as
messages may appear one after On some vehicles, this message possible. See your dealer.
another. displays if there is a problem with
the battery charging system. Under Compass Messages
The messages that do not require
certain conditions, the charging
immediate action can be
system light may also turn on in the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
acknowledged and cleared by
instrument panel cluster. See CIRCLES
pressing V (Set/Reset). Charging System Light on
page 5‑20. Driving with this problem This message displays when
The messages that require calibrating the compass. Drive the
immediate action cannot be cleared could drain the battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Have the vehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h
until that action is performed. (5 mph) to complete the calibration.
electrical system checked as soon
All messages should be taken as possible. See your dealer. See Compass on page 5‑5 for more
seriously and clearing the message information.
does not correct the problem. Brake System Messages CALIBRATION COMPLETE
The following are the possible
messages and some information SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays when the
about them. compass calibration is complete.
This message displays along with See Compass on page 5‑5 for more
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, the brake system warning light if information.
see the Duramax® diesel there is a problem with the brake
supplement for more information. system. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑23. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible
Door Ajar Messages close the door again. Check to see Engine Cooling System
if the message still appears on
CARGO DOOR OPEN the DIC.
Messages
This message displays and a chime PASSENGER DOOR OPEN ENGINE HOT A/C
sounds if the cargo door is open (Air Conditioning) OFF
while the ignition is in ON/RUN. This message displays and a chime
sounds if the passenger door is not This message displays when the
Turn off the vehicle and check the engine coolant becomes hotter than
cargo door. Restart the vehicle and fully closed and the vehicle is in a
drive gear. Stop and turn off the the normal operating temperature.
check for the message on the DIC See Engine Coolant Temperature
display. vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door Gauge on page 5‑14. To avoid
DRIVER DOOR OPEN again. Check to see if the message added strain on a hot engine,
still appears on the DIC. the air conditioning compressor
This message displays and a chime automatically turns off. When the
sounds if the driver door is not fully RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN coolant temperature returns to
closed and the vehicle is in a drive normal, the air conditioning
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, On some vehicles, this message
displays and a chime sounds if the compressor turns back on. You can
check the door for obstructions, and continue to drive the vehicle.
close the door again. Check to see passenger side rear door is not fully
if the message still appears on closed and the vehicle is in a drive If this message continues to appear,
the DIC. gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, have the system repaired by your
check the door for obstructions, and dealer as soon as possible to avoid
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN close the door again. Check to see damage to the engine.
On some vehicles, this message if the message still appears on
displays and a chime sounds if the the DIC.
driver side rear door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is in a drive
gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Engine Oil Messages

ENGINE ENGINE
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Notice: If you drive the vehicle Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating, This message displays when the
severe engine damage may severe engine damage may engine oil needs to be changed.
occur. If an overheat warning occur. If an overheat warning When you change the engine oil, be
appears on the instrument panel appears on the instrument panel sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
cluster and/or DIC, stop the cluster and/or DIC, stop the OIL SOON message. See Engine
vehicle as soon as possible. vehicle as soon as possible. Oil Life System on page 10‑11 for
See Engine Overheating on See Engine Overheating on information on how to reset the
page 10‑24 for more information. page 10‑24 for more information. message. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑7 and Scheduled
This message displays when the This message displays and a chime Maintenance on page 11‑3 for more
engine coolant temperature is too sounds if the engine cooling system information.
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to reaches unsafe temperatures for
idle until it cools down. See Engine operation. Stop and turn off the ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
Coolant Temperature Gauge on vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,
page 5‑14. to avoid severe damage. This this message displays if the oil level
message clears when the engine in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
has cooled to a safe operating level and correct it as necessary.
temperature. You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑7 for
additional information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages
ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime
low, severe engine damage may sounds when the cooling system sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
occur. If a low oil pressure temperature gets too hot and the as soon as possible. See Fuel
warning appears on the Driver engine further enters the engine Gauge on page 5‑12 and Fuel on
Information Center (DIC), stop the coolant protection mode. See page 9‑42 for more information.
vehicle as soon as possible. Do Engine Overheating on page 10‑24
for further information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP
not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is This message also displays when This message may display along
corrected. See Engine Oil on the engine power is reduced. with the check engine light on the
page 10‑7 for more information. Reduced engine power can affect instrument panel cluster if the fuel
the vehicle's ability to accelerate. cap is not tightened properly. See
This message displays if low oil Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
pressure levels occur. Stop the If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed page 5‑20. Reinstall the fuel cap
vehicle as soon as safely possible fully. See Filling the Tank on
and do not operate it until the cause to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the page 9‑46. The diagnostic system
of the low oil pressure has been can determine if the fuel cap has
corrected. Check the oil as soon as next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced been left off or improperly installed.
possible and have the vehicle A loose or missing fuel cap allows
serviced by your dealer. See Engine speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be fuel to evaporate into the
Oil on page 10‑7. atmosphere. A few driving trips with
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be the cap properly installed should
taken to your dealer for service as turn this light and message off.
soon as possible.
Key and Lock Messages TURN SIGNAL ON SERVICE TRACTION

This message displays and a chime CONTROL
REPLACE BATTERY IN
sounds if a turn signal is left on for If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
REMOTE KEY 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turn message displays when there is a
This message displays if a Remote signal/multifunction lever to the off problem with the Traction Control
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter position. System (TCS). When this message
battery is low. The battery needs to displays, the system will not limit
be replaced in the transmitter. See Ride Control System wheel spin. Adjust your driving
“Battery Replacement” under accordingly. See your dealer for
Messages
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) service. See StabiliTrak® System on
System Operation on page 2‑3. SERVICE STABILITRAK page 9‑37 for more information.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak® and STABILITRAK NOT READY
Lamp Messages this message displays, it means
there may be a problem with the If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
AUTOMATIC LIGHT message may display and the
CONTROL OFF StabiliTrak system. If you see this
message, try to reset the system. StabiliTrak indicator light on the
This message displays when the Stop; turn off the engine for at least instrument panel cluster may be on
automatic headlamps are turned off. 15 seconds; then start the engine after first driving the vehicle and
See Exterior Lamp Controls on again. If this message still comes exceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for
page 6‑1 for more information. on, it means there is a problem. You 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system
should see your dealer for service. is not functional until the light has
AUTOMATIC LIGHT turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle is safe to drive,
CONTROL ON on page 9‑37 for more information.
however, you do not have the
This message displays when the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
automatic headlamps are turned on. your speed and drive accordingly.
See Exterior Lamp Controls on
STABILITRAK OFF There are several conditions that TRACTION CONTROL OFF
can cause this message to appear.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
message displays when you turn off . One condition is overheating, message displays when the Traction
StabiliTrak, or when the stability which could occur if StabiliTrak Control System (TCS) is turned off.
control has been automatically activates continuously for an Adjust your driving accordingly. See
disabled. To limit wheel spin and extended period of time. StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37
realize the full benefits of the . The message also displays if the for more information.
stability enhancement system, you brake system warning light is on.
should normally leave StabiliTrak See Brake System Warning Airbag System Messages
on. However, you should turn Light on page 5‑23.
StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets SERVICE AIR BAG
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
. The message could display if the
stability system takes longer This message displays if there is a
and you want to rock the vehicle to problem with the airbag system.
attempt to free it, or if you are than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving Have your dealer inspect the
driving in extreme off-road system for problems. See Airbag
conditions and require more wheel conditions.
Readiness Light on page 5‑16 and
spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on . The message displays if an Airbag System on page 3‑25 for
page 9‑11. To turn the StabiliTrak engine or vehicle related more information.
system on or off, see StabiliTrak® problem has been detected and
System on page 9‑37. the vehicle needs service. See
your dealer.
The message turns off as soon as
the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
longer present.
Anti-theft Alarm System Service Vehicle Messages This message only appears while
the ignition is in ON/RUN, and will
Messages SERVICE A/C SYSTEM not disappear until the problem is
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT This message displays when the resolved.
SYSTEM electronic sensors that control the This message cannot be
This message displays when there air conditioning and heating acknowledged.
is a problem with the theft-deterrent systems are no longer working.
system. The vehicle may or may not Have the climate control system Tire Messages
restart so you may want to take the serviced by your dealer if you notice
a drop in heating and air CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or
vehicle to your dealer before turning
off the engine. See Immobilizer conditioning efficiency. TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
Operation on page 2‑12 for more SERVICE VEHICLE SOON If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
information. Monitor System (TPMS), this
This message displays when a message displays when the
WAIT TO START non-emissions related malfunction pressure in one or more of the tires
This message displays briefly when occurs. Have the vehicle serviced is low. The low tire pressure warning
the theft-deterrent system has by your dealer as soon as possible. light will also come on. See Tire
initially found incorrect conditions STARTING DISABLED Pressure Light on page 5‑25. This
within the vehicle and is making a SERVICE THROTTLE message will also indicate which tire
double check. If your vehicle does needs to be checked. You can
not start soon after, try to start it This message displays if the starting receive more than one tire pressure
again. If it still does not start, have of the engine is disabled due to the message at a time. To read the
your vehicle serviced by your electronic throttle control system. other messages that may have been
dealer. Have the vehicle serviced by your sent at the same time, press the set/
dealer immediately. reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears on the DIC, stop
as soon as you can. Have the tire
pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
Information label. See Tires on ENGINE
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
page 10‑50, Vehicle Load Limits on
Monitor System (TPMS), this Notice: If you drive the vehicle
page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on
message displays when the system while the transmission fluid is
page 10‑57. The DIC also shows
is re-learning the tire positions on overheating and the transmission
the tire pressure values. See Driver
the vehicle. See Driver Information temperature warning is displayed
Information Center (DIC) on
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 for more on the instrument panel cluster
page 5‑27.
information. The tire positions must and/or DIC, you can damage the
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR be re-learned after rotating the tires transmission. This could lead to
SYSTEM or after replacing a tire or sensor. costly repairs that would not be
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑63, covered by the warranty. Do not
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Tire Rotation on page 10‑63, Tire drive the vehicle with overheated
Monitor System (TPMS), this Pressure Monitor Operation on transmission fluid or while the
message displays if a part on the page 10‑59, and Tire Pressure on transmission temperature
system is not working properly. The page 10‑57 for more information. warning is displayed.
tire pressure light also flashes and
then remains on during the same This message displays along with a
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Transmission Messages chime if the transmission fluid in the
Light on page 5‑25. Several SERVICE TRANSMISSION vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
conditions may cause this message transmission fluid temperature high
to appear. See Tire Pressure This message displays when there can cause damage to the vehicle.
Monitor Operation on page 10‑59 for is a problem with the transmission. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
more information. If the warning See your dealer for service. allow the transmission to cool. This
comes on and stays on, there may message clears and the chime
be a problem with the TPMS. See stops when the fluid temperature
your dealer. reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder Vehicle Entering the Feature

Messages Settings Menu
Personalization
1. Turn the ignition on and place
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE This vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park).
WITH CARE customization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the
This message displays when the battery, it is recommended that
outside air temperature is cold one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off.
enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press U to enter the feature
accordingly. cannot be programmed to a settings menu.
preferred setting for two different
drivers. If the menu is not available,
FEATURE SETTINGS
All of the customization options may AVAILABLE IN PARK will
not be available on your vehicle. display. Before entering the
Only the options available will be menu, make sure the vehicle is
displayed on the DIC. in P (Park).
The default settings for the
customization features were set
when the vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed from their
default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
Feature Settings Menu Items Press U until the LANGUAGE AUTO DOOR LOCK
The following are customization screen appears on the DIC display. This feature allows you to select
features that allow you to program Press V once to access the settings when the doors will
settings to the vehicle: for this feature. Then press U to automatically lock.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH scroll through the following settings: Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature will only display if a ENGLISH (default): All messages appears on the DIC display. Press
language other than English has will appear in English. V once to access the settings for
been set. This feature allows you to FRANCAIS: All messages will this feature. Then press U to scroll
change the language in which the appear in French. through the following settings:
DIC messages appear to English. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
ESPANOL: All messages will
Press U until the PRESS V TO appear in Spanish. The doors will automatically lock
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen when the vehicle is shifted out of
ARABIC: All messages will appear P (Park).
appears on the DIC display. Press in Arabic.
the set/reset button once to display AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
all DIC messages in English. NO CHANGE: No change will be will automatically lock when the
made to this feature. The current vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
LANGUAGE setting will remain. (8 mph) for three seconds.
This feature allows you to select the
To select a setting, press V while NO CHANGE: No change will be
language in which the DIC
the desired setting is displayed on made to this feature. The current
messages will appear.
the DIC. A beep will sound once a setting will remain.
language has been selected.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on
the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the Press U until REMOTE DOOR
This feature allows you to select doors will unlock when the vehicle is LOCK appears on the DIC display.
shifted into P (Park).
whether or not to turn off the Press V once to access the settings
automatic door unlocking feature. NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press U to
It also allows you to select which made to this feature. The current
scroll through the following settings:
doors and when the doors will setting will remain.
automatically unlock. OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press Q on the RKE
Press U until AUTO DOOR the desired setting is displayed on
transmitter.
UNLOCK appears on the DIC the DIC.
display. Press V once to access the LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
settings for this feature. Then press will flash when you press Q on the
U to scroll through the following This feature allows you to select the RKE transmitter.
settings: type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
OFF: None of the doors will Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) on the second press of Q on the
automatically unlock. transmitter. You will not receive RKE transmitter.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the feedback when locking the vehicle HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
driver door will unlock when the key with the RKE transmitter if the doors exterior lamps will flash when you
is taken out of the ignition. are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on press Q on the RKE transmitter, and
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver page 2‑3 for more information. the horn will sound when Q is
door will unlock when the vehicle is pressed again within five seconds of
shifted into P (Park) . the previous command.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken
out of the ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press U until REMOTE DOOR DELAY DOOR LOCK
made to this feature. The current UNLOCK appears on the DIC This feature allows you to select
setting will remain.
display. Press V once to access the whether or not the locking of the
To select a setting, press V while settings for this feature. Then press doors will be delayed. When locking
the desired setting is displayed on U to scroll through the following the doors with the power door lock
the DIC. settings: switch and a door is open, this
feature will delay locking the doors
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps until five seconds after the last door
will not flash when you press K on is closed. You will hear three chimes
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive the RKE transmitter. to signal that the delayed locking
when unlocking the vehicle with the LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior feature is in use. The key must be
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) out of the ignition for this feature to
lamps will flash when you press K work. You can temporarily override
transmitter. You will not receive on the RKE transmitter.
feedback when unlocking the delayed locking by pressing the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if NO CHANGE: No change will be power door lock switch twice or Q
the doors are open. See Remote made to this feature. The current on the RKE transmitter twice. See
Keyless Entry (RKE) System setting will remain. Delayed Locking on page 2‑8 for
Operation on page 2‑3 for more To select a setting, press V while more information.
information.
the DIC.
Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCK Press U until EXIT LIGHTING APPROACH LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press appears on the DIC display. Press This feature allows you to select
V once to access the settings for V once to access the settings for whether or not to have the exterior
this feature. Then press U to scroll this feature. Then press U to scroll lamps turn on briefly during low light
through the following settings: through the following settings: periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not Entry (RKE) transmitter.
locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on.
ON (default): The doors will not 10 SECONDS (default): The Press U until APPROACH
lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for LIGHTING appears on the DIC
door is closed. 10 seconds. display. Press V once to access the
NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will settings for this feature. Then press
made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. U to scroll through the following
setting will remain. settings:
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
OFF: The exterior lamps will not
To select a setting, press V while stay on for two minutes.
turn on when you unlock the vehicle
the desired setting is displayed on NO CHANGE: No change will be with the RKE transmitter.
the DIC. made to this feature. The current
EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press V while
amount of time you want the the desired setting is displayed on
exterior lamps to remain on when it the DIC.
is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME FACTORY SETTINGS

outside, the exterior lamps will turn This feature allows you to select the This feature allows you to set all of
on briefly when you unlock the volume level of the chime. the customization features back to
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. their factory default settings.
The lamps will remain on for Press U until CHIME VOLUME
20 seconds or until Q on the RKE appears on the DIC display. Press Press U until FACTORY SETTINGS
transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle V once to access the settings for appears on the DIC display. Press
is no longer off. See Remote this feature. Then press U to scroll V once to access the settings for
Keyless Entry (RKE) System through the following settings: this feature. Then press U to scroll
Operation on page 2‑3 for more through the following settings:
information. NORMAL: The chime volume will
be set to a normal level. RESTORE ALL (default): The
NO CHANGE: No change will be customization features will be set to
made to this feature. The current LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level. their factory default settings.
setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be DO NOT RESTORE: The
To select a setting, press V while made to this feature. The current customization features will not be
the desired setting is displayed on setting will remain. set to their factory default settings.
the DIC.
There is no default for chime To select a setting, press V while
volume. The volume will stay at the the desired setting is displayed on
last known setting. the DIC.
the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS Exiting the Feature

This feature allows you to exit the Settings Menu
feature settings menu. The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS
occurs:
PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the . The vehicle is no longer in
DIC display. Press V once to exit ON/RUN.
the menu.
. The 3 or T DIC buttons are
If you do not exit, pressing U will pressed.
return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
. The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
. A 40 second time period has
elapsed with no selection made.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting The exterior lamps control has four

positions:
Exterior Lamp Controls O (Off): Briefly turn the control to
Exterior Lighting this position to turn the automatic
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 headlamps and Daytime Running
Exterior Lamps Off Lamps (DRL) off or back on.
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 For vehicles first sold in Canada,
Headlamp High/Low-Beam the off position only works for
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 vehicles that are shifted into the
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 P (Park) position.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 AUTO (Automatic): Turns on the
Automatic Headlamp headlamps automatically at normal
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 brightness, together with the
The exterior lamps control is located following:
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change . Parking Lamps
the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
. Instrument Panel Lights
It controls the following systems:
Interior Lighting
. Headlamps
. Taillamps
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 . Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
. Parking Lamps
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 . Instrument Panel Lights
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
6-2 Lighting
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the A warning chime sounds if the driver Headlamp High/
parking lamps together with the door is opened while the ignition
switch is off and the headlamps
Low-Beam Changer
following:
. Instrument Panel Lights
are on. 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low‐Beam
To change the headlamps from low Changer): Pull the turn signal lever
. Taillamps beam to high beam, push the turn all the way toward you to change
signal/multifunction lever toward the the headlamps from low to high
instrument panel. beam. Then release it.
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
following lamps listed below. Exterior Lamps Off
. Parking Lamps
Reminder
. Instrument Panel Lights If a door is open, a reminder chime
sounds when the headlamps or
. Taillamps parking lamps are manually turned
. License Plate Lamps on and the key is out of the ignition. This instrument panel cluster light
To turn off the chime, turn the comes on when the high beam
If the headlamps are turned on
while the vehicle is on, the headlamp switch to O or AUTO and headlamps are on.
headlamps turn off automatically then back on, or close and re‐open
10 minutes after the ignition is the door. In the auto mode, the
turned off. If the headlamps are headlamps turn off once the ignition
turned on while the vehicle is off, is in LOCK/OFF or may remain on
the headlamps will continue to stay until the headlamp delay ends,
on. To prevent the battery from if enabled in the Driver Information
being drained, turn the control to the Center (DIC). See “Exit Lighting”
O position. under Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑40.
Lighting 6-3
Flash-to-Pass The DRL system comes on in Automatic Headlamp

daylight when the following
This feature is used to signal to the conditions are met:
System
vehicle ahead that you want When it is dark enough outside and
to pass.
. The ignition is on.
the headlamp switch is in AUTO,
. The exterior lamps control is in
If the headlamps are off or in the the automatic headlamp system
low‐beam position, pull the turn the AUTO position. turns on the headlamps, along with
signal lever toward you to . The shift lever is not in P (Park). the taillamps, sidemarker, parking
momentarily switch to high‐beams. lamps, roof marker lamps, and the
. The light sensor determines it is instrument panel lights. The radio
Release the lever to turn the daytime. lights will also be dim.
high-beam headlamps off.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps, To turn off the automatic headlamp
sidemarker, instrument panel and system, turn the exterior lamps
Daytime Running other lamps will not be on. switch to the off position and then
Lamps (DRL) The automatic headlamp system release. For vehicles first sold in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can automatically switches from DRL to Canada, the transmission must be
make it easier for others to see the the headlamps depending on the in the P (Park) position, before the
front of the vehicle during the day. darkness of the surroundings. automatic headlamp system can be
Fully functional daytime running turned off.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. lamp control to O and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the transmission must be in the
P (Park) position, before the DRL
can be turned off.
6-4 Lighting
when the light sensor sees a Hazard Warning Flashers

change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage,
it takes approximately 30 seconds
for the automatic headlamp system
The vehicle has a light sensor to change to DRL if it is light
located on the top of the instrument outside. During that delay, the
panel. Do not cover the sensor or instrument panel cluster may not be
the system will come on whenever as bright as usual. Make sure the
the ignition is on. instrument panel brightness control
The system may also turn on the is in the full bright position. See
headlamps when driving through a Instrument Panel Illumination | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
parking garage or tunnel. Control on page 6‑5. Press this button located on top of
There is a delay in the transition the steering column, to make the
between the daytime and nighttime front and rear turn signal lamps
operation of the Daytime Running flash on and off. This warns others
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic that you are having trouble. Press
headlamp systems so that driving again to turn the flashers off.
under bridges or bright overhead When the hazard warning flashers
street lights does not affect the are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
system. The DRL and automatic not work.
headlamp system is only affected
Lighting 6-5
Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Interior Lighting
position when released.
Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane Instrument Panel
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
Illumination Control
may be burned out. The knob for this feature is located
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb to the left of the steering column.
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑44.
G : An arrow on the instrument Turn Signal On Chime
panel cluster flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change. If the turn signal is left on for more
than 1.2 km (3/4 mi), a chime
To signal a turn, move the lever all
sounds at each flash of the turn
the way up or down.
signal and the message TURN
To signal a lane change, raise SIGNAL ON also appears in the
or lower the lever until the arrow Driver Information Center (DIC). See
starts to flash. The turn signal Lamp Messages on page 5‑36. To
automatically flashes three times turn off the chime and message,
and if the tow‐haul mode is active it move the turn signal lever to the off
flashes six times. Holding the turn position. D (Instrument Panel Lights):
signal lever for more than Push the knob to extend and then
one second causes the turn signals turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to flash continually until the lever is to brighten or dim the instrument
released. panel lights and the radio display.
This only works if the headlamps or
parking lamps are on.
6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

The dome lamps come on when any For vehicles with reading lamps,
door is opened. They turn off after press the button located next to
all the doors are closed. each lamp to turn it on or off.
The instrument panel brightness The vehicle may also have reading
knob extends when D is pressed. lamps in other locations. The lamps
To manually turn on the dome cannot be adjusted.
lamps, press D then turn the knob
clockwise to the farthest position. In
this position, the dome lamps
remain on whether a door is opened
or closed. The dome lamp override sets the
dome lamps to remain off or come
Dome Lamp Override on automatically when a door is
opened.
The DOME OFF E button is
located above the instrument panel E DOME OFF: Press this button
brightness knob. in and the dome lamps remain off
when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the
extended position so that the dome
lamps come on when a door is
opened.
Lighting 6-7
Lighting Features display on the Driver Information

Center (DIC), you may see the
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
voltage move up or down. This is accessories.
Entry/Exit Lighting normal. If there is a problem, an Normally, these actions occur in
The vehicle has an illuminated alert will be displayed. steps or levels, without being
entry/exit feature. The battery can be discharged at noticeable. In rare cases at the
The dome lamps come on if the E idle if the electrical loads are very highest levels of corrective action,
button is in the out position, when a high. This is true for all vehicles. this action may be noticeable to the
This is because the generator driver. If so, a Driver Information
door is opened or the key is
(alternator) may not be spinning fast Center (DIC) message might be
removed from the ignition.
enough at idle to produce all the displayed, such as SERVICE
power that is needed for very high BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.
Battery Load electrical loads. If this messages displays, it is
Management A high electrical load occurs when recommended that the driver reduce
The vehicle may have Electric several of the following are on, such the electrical loads as much as
Power Management (EPM) that as: headlamps, high beams, fog possible. See Battery Voltage and
estimates the battery's temperature lamps, rear window defogger, Charging Messages on page 5‑32.
and state of charge. It then adjusts climate control fan at high speed,
the voltage for best performance heated seats, engine cooling fans, Battery Power Protection
and extended life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into This feature shuts off the dome
When the battery's state of charge accessory power outlets. lamps if they are left on for more
is low, the voltage is raised slightly EPM works to prevent excessive than 10 minutes when the ignition is
to quickly bring the charge back up. discharge of the battery. It does this in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
When the state of charge is high, by balancing the generator's output the battery from running down.
the voltage is lowered slightly to and the vehicle's electrical needs.
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle It can increase engine idle speed to
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage generate more power, whenever
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Introduction { WARNING

System Infotainment Taking your eyes off the road for
extended periods could cause a
If the vehicle came without a radio,
the wiring provisions for a radio and crash resulting in injury or death
Introduction
an antenna were installed at the to you or others. Do not give
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
assembly plant, so that if you want, extended attention to
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 a radio can be installed at the entertainment tasks while driving.
dealer.
Radio This system provides access to
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Determine which radio the vehicle
has and read the following pages to many audio and non audio listings.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 become familiar with its features.
Fixed Mast Antenna
(Multi-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Fixed Mast
Antenna (Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: The chime signals related Theft-Deterrent Feature
road while driving, do the following to safety belts, parking brake, and
while the vehicle is parked: other functions of the vehicle TheftLock® is designed to
operate through the radio/ discourage theft of the radio. The
. Become familiar with the feature works automatically by
operation and controls of the entertainment system. If that
equipment is replaced or learning a portion of the Vehicle
audio system. Identification Number (VIN). If the
additional equipment is added to
. Set up the tone, speaker the vehicle, the chimes may not radio is moved to a different vehicle,
adjustments, and preset radio work. Make sure that replacement it does not operate and either LOC
stations. or additional equipment is or LOCKED displays.
For more information, see Defensive compatible with the vehicle When the radio and vehicle are
Driving on page 9‑2. before installing it. See turned off, there may be a blinking
Accessories and Modifications on red light to indicate TheftLock is
Notice: Contact your dealer page 10‑3. armed.
before adding any equipment.
The vehicle has Retained With TheftLock activated, the radio
Adding audio or communication Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, does not operate if stolen.
equipment could interfere with the audio system can be played
the operation of the engine, radio, even after the ignition is turned off.
or other systems, and could See Retained Accessory Power
damage them. Follow federal (RAP) on page 9‑23 for more
rules covering mobile radio and information.
telephone equipment.
Operation
AM-FM Radio
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and

AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to
switch the display between the radio
station frequency and the time.
While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time. Press to
display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS
station or MP3 song. A choice of
additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can display. Continue
pressing to highlight the desired tab,
or press the softkey located under
any one of the tabs and the
information about that tab displays.
Speed Compensated Volume
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3) and Radio (SCV): Radios with Speed
with CD Similar Compensated Volume (SCV)
automatically adjust the radio
The vehicle has one of these radios Using the Radio volume to compensate for road and
as its audio system. wind noise as the vehicles speed
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn changes while driving, so that the
the system on and off. volume level stays consistent.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the volume.
To activate SCV: Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) Setting the Tone (Bass/
1. Set the radio volume to the (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Midrange/Treble) (All Except
desired level. Radio with CD) AM-FM Radio and Radio
2. Press the MENU button to To adjust the bass or treble: with CD)
display the radio setup menu. BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
1. Press the f knob until Bass or or Treble): To adjust the bass,
3. Press the softkey under the Treble displays. midrange, or treble:
AUTO VOLUM (automatic
2. To adjust the setting, do one of
volume) tab on the radio display.
the following: 1. Press the f knob until the tone
4. Press the softkey under the control tabs display.
desired Speed Compensated . Turn the f knob. 2. Highlight the desired tone
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, control tab by doing one of the
. Press either ¨ SEEK,
or High) to select the level of following:
radio volume compensation. or © SEEK.
The display times out after . Press the f knob.
approximately 10 seconds. Each
. Press either \ FWD,
or s REV.
. Press the softkey under the
higher setting allows for more desired tab.
radio volume compensation at EQ (Equalization): Press this
faster vehicle speeds. button to choose bass and treble
equalization settings designed for
different types of music. Selecting
MANUAL, or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one EQ (Equalization): Press this 2. To adjust the setting, do one of
of the following: button to choose bass and treble the following:
equalization settings designed for
. Turn the f knob clockwise different types of music. Selecting
. Turn the f knob.
or counterclockwise. MANUAL, or changing bass or . Press either ¨ SEEK,
. Press the ¨ SEEK, treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings. or © SEEK.
or © SEEK.
Unique EQ settings can be saved . Press either \ FWD,
. Press the \ FWD, for each source. or s REV.
or s REV. If the radio has a Bose® audio
system, the EQ settings are either Adjusting the Speakers
If a station's frequency is weak or if (Balance/Fade) (All Except
there is static, decrease the treble. MANUAL or TALK.
AM-FM Radio and Radio
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers with CD)
or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
press the softkey positioned under and AM-FM Radio with CD) adjust the balance or fade:
the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
To adjust the balance or fade:
more than two seconds. A beep 1. Press the f knob until the
sounds and the level adjusts to the 1. Press ` or press the f knob speaker control tabs display.
middle position. until the speaker control tab
2. Highlight the desired speaker
To quickly adjust all tone and displays.
control tab by doing one of the
speaker controls to the middle following:
position, press the f knob for more
than two seconds until a beep
. Press the f knob.
sounds. . Press the softkey under the
desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one Radio Messages Radio

of the following:
Calibration Error: The audio
. Turn the f knob clockwise system has been calibrated AM-FM Radio
or counterclockwise. for the vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it Radio Data System (RDS)
. Press the ¨ SEEK, means that the radio has not been The Radio may have a Radio Data
or © SEEK. configured properly for the vehicle System (RDS). The RDS feature is
and it must be returned to your available for use only on FM
. Press the \ FWD, dealer for service. stations that broadcast RDS
or s REV. Locked or Loc: One of these information. This system relies upon
To quickly adjust all speaker and messages will display when the receiving specific information from
tone controls to the middle position, TheftLock® system has locked up these stations and only works when
the radio. Take the vehicle to your the information is available. While
press the f knob for more than the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
dealer for service.
two seconds. station, the station name or call
If any error occurs repeatedly or if letters displays. In rare cases, a
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is an error cannot be corrected,
turned on, the radio disables FADE radio station could broadcast
contact your dealer. incorrect information that causes the
and mutes the rear speakers.
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Finding a Station The radio seeks and scans stations 3. Tune in the desired station.
only with a strong signal that are in 4. Press and hold one of the six
BAND: Press to switch between
the selected band. numbered softkeys for
FM1, FM2, AM and XM. The
selection displays. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with three seconds until a beep
CD (Base), scan presets within the sounds. When that softkey is
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or current selected band by pressing pressed and released, the
counterclockwise to increase or
and holding either SEEK arrow for station that was set, returns.
decrease the station frequency.
four seconds until a double beep 5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for
© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to go sounds. The radio goes to a stored each softkey.
to the previous or to the next station preset, plays for a few seconds if a
and stay there. strong signal is present, then goes Storing a Radio Station as a
To scan stations, press and hold to the next stored preset. The Favorite
either arrow for two seconds until a station frequency flashes while the
radio is in the scan mode. Drivers are encouraged to set up
beep sounds. The radio goes to a their radio station favorites while the
station, plays for a few seconds, Setting Preset Stations vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
then goes to the next station. For stations using the presets, favorites
AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD If the radio does not have a FAV
button, and steering wheel controls,
(Base), the station frequency button, up to 18 stations (six FM1,
if the vehicle has this feature. See
flashes while the radio is in the scan six FM2, and six AM), can be
Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.
mode. Press either arrow again to programmed on the six numbered
stop scanning. softkeys, by performing the following
steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1,
FM2, or AM.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has 4. Repeat the steps for each Satellite Radio
a FAV button, a maximum of softkey radio station you want
36 stations can be programmed as stored as a favorite. Finding a Category (CAT)
favorites using the six softkeys The number of favorites pages can Station
positioned below the radio station be setup using the MENU button. To CAT (Category): The CAT button is
frequency tabs and by using the setup the number of favorites used to find XM™ stations while the
radio favorites page button (FAV pages: radio is in the XM™ mode.
button). Press the FAV button to go
through up to six pages of favorites, 1. Press the MENU button to XM™ is a satellite radio service that
each having six favorite stations display the radio setup menu. is based in the United States and
available per page. Each page of 2. Press the softkey located below Canada only.
favorites can contain any the FAV 1-6 tab.
combination of AM and FM stations. Finding a Station
3. Select the desired number of BAND: Press to switch between
The balance/fade and tone settings favorites pages by pressing the
that were previously adjusted, are FM1, FM2, AM, and XM. The
softkey located below the selection displays.
stored with the favorite stations. displayed page numbers.
To store a station as a favorite: f (Tune): Turn clockwise or
4. Press the FAV button, or let the counterclockwise to increase or
1. Tune to the desired radio station. menu time out, to return to the decrease the station frequency.
original main radio screen
2. Press the FAV button to display showing the radio station
the page where the station is to frequency tabs and to begin the
be stored. process of programming your
3. Press and hold one of the favorites for the chosen amount
six softkeys until a beep sounds. of numbered pages.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the station that
was set, returns.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to go Setting Preset Stations Storing a Radio Station as a
to the previous or to the next station If the radio does not have a FAV Favorite
and stay there. button, up to 18 stations (six FM1, Drivers are encouraged to set up
To scan stations, press and hold six FM2, and six AM), can be their radio station favorites while the
either arrow for two seconds until a programmed on the six numbered vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
beep sounds. The radio goes to a softkeys, by performing the following stations using the presets, favorites
station, plays for a few seconds, steps: button, and steering wheel controls,
then goes to the next station. For 1. Turn the radio on. if the vehicle has this feature. See
AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD Defensive Driving on page 9‑2.
(Base), the station frequency 2. Press BAND to select FM1,
FM2, or AM. FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has
flashes while the radio is in the scan a FAV button, a maximum of
mode. Press either arrow again to 3. Tune in the desired station. 36 stations can be programmed as
stop scanning. favorites using the six softkeys
4. Press and hold one of the six
The radio seeks and scans stations numbered softkeys for positioned below the radio station
only with a strong signal that are in three seconds until a beep frequency tabs and by using the
the selected band. sounds. When that softkey is radio favorites page button (FAV
pressed and released, the button). Press the FAV button to go
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with
station that was set, returns. through up to six pages of favorites,
CD (Base), scan presets within the
current selected band by pressing each having six favorite stations
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for available per page. Each page of
and holding either SEEK arrow for each softkey. favorites can contain any
four seconds until a double beep
sounds. The radio goes to a stored combination of AM and FM stations.
preset, plays for a few seconds if a The balance/fade and tone settings
strong signal is present, then goes that were previously adjusted, are
to the next stored preset. The stored with the favorite stations.
station frequency flashes while the
radio is in the scan mode.
To store a station as a favorite: 3. Select the desired number of AM

1. Tune to the desired radio station. favorites pages by pressing the
The range for most AM stations is
softkey located below the
2. Press the FAV button to display greater than for FM, especially at
displayed page numbers.
the page where the station is to night. The longer range can cause
be stored. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the station frequencies to interfere with
menu time out, to return to the each other. For better radio
3. Press and hold one of the original main radio screen reception, most AM radio stations
six softkeys until a beep sounds. showing the radio station boost the power levels during the
When that softkey is pressed frequency tabs and to begin the day, and then reduce these levels
and released, the station that process of programming your during the night. Static can also
was set, returns. favorites for the chosen amount occur when things like storms and
4. Repeat the steps for each of numbered pages. power lines interfere with radio
softkey radio station you want reception. When this happens, try
stored as a favorite. Radio Reception reducing the treble on the radio.
The number of favorites pages can Frequency interference and static FM Stereo
be setup using the MENU button. To can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone FM stereo gives the best sound, but
setup the number of favorites
chargers, vehicle convenience FM signals reach only about 16 to
pages:
accessories, and external electronic 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Tall
1. Press the MENU button to buildings or hills can interfere with
devices are plugged into the
display the radio setup menu. FM signals, causing the sound to
accessory power outlet. If there is
2. Press the softkey located below interference or static, unplug the fade in and out.
the FAV 1-6 tab. item from the accessory power
outlet.
Cellular Phone Usage Fixed Mast Audio Players

Cellular phone usage may cause Antenna (Care)
interference with the radio. This
The fixed mast antenna can CD Player
interference may occur when
withstand most car washes without Care of the CD Player
making or receiving phone calls,
being damaged as long as it is
charging the phone's battery, Do not add any label to a CD.
securely attached to the base. If the
or simply having the phone on. This It could get caught in the CD. If a
mast becomes slightly bent,
interference causes an increased CD is recorded on a personal
straighten it out by hand. If the mast
level of static while listening to the computer and a description label is
is badly bent, replace it.
radio. If static is received while needed, try labeling the top of the
listening to the radio, unplug the Make sure there is sufficient recorded CD with a marking pen.
cellular phone and turn it off. clearance when entering garages or
parking structures. The use of CD lens cleaners is not
Fixed Mast Antenna advised, due to the risk of
Occasionally check to make sure contaminating the lens of the CD
(Multi-Band) the antenna is tightened to its base. optics with lubricants internal to the
If tightening is required, tighten CD player mechanism.
The multi-band antenna is located by hand.
on the roof of the vehicle. The
antenna is used for OnStar and the
XM Satellite Radio Service System
if the vehicle has these features.
Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear reception.
Make sure there is sufficient
clearance when entering garages or
parking structures.
Notice: If a label is added to a surface of a CD is damaged, such Ejecting a CD (Single CD

CD, more than one CD is inserted as cracked, broken, or scratched, Player)
into the slot at a time, or an the CD does not play properly or not
attempt is made to play scratched at all. Do not touch the bottom side Z EJECT: Press and release to
or damaged CDs, the CD player of a CD while handling it; this could eject the disc. Remove the CD
could be damaged. While using damage the surface. Pick up CDs when Remove Disc displays. If the
the CD player, use only CDs in by grasping the outer edges or the disc is not removed, after several
good condition without any label, edge of the hole and the outer edge. seconds the disc is automatically
load one CD at a time, and keep pulled back into the player.
If the surface of a CD is soiled,
the CD player and the loading slot clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or Playing a CD
free of foreign materials, liquids, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
and debris. If the ignition or radio is turned off
neutral detergent solution mixed with a CD in the player, it stays in
If an error displays, see “CD Player with water. Make sure the wiping the player. When the ignition or
Messages” later in this section. process starts from the center to radio is turned on, the CD starts
the edge. playing where it stopped, if it was
Care of CDs
Inserting a CD (Single CD the last selected audio source.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or Player) When a CD is inserted, the CD
CD-RW quality, the method of symbol displays on the left side of
Insert a CD partway into the slot,
recording, the quality of the music the radio display. As each new track
label side up. The player pulls it in
that has been recorded, and the starts to play, the track number
and the CD should begin playing.
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been displays.
handled. Handle them carefully. The CD player can play the smaller
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
original cases or other protective adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
cases and away from direct sunlight smaller CDs are loaded in the same
and dust. The CD player scans the manner.
bottom surface of the disc. If the
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen to
cycle between CD or Auxiliary when the CD that is currently playing. tracks in random, rather than
listening to the radio. The CD icon sequential order. To use random, do
and a message showing the disc © SEEK: Press to go to the start of one of the following:
and/or track number will display the current track if more than
10 seconds on the CD have played. For the AM-FM Radio with CD:
when a CD is in the player. Press
again and the system automatically Press to go to the previous track if 1. Press the RDM button until the
searches for an auxiliary input less than 10 seconds on the CD random icon displays.
device; see Auxiliary Devices on have played. 2. Press the RDM button again
page 7‑18 for more information. If a until the random icon disappears
Press and hold, or press multiple
portable audio player is not from the display.
times, to continue moving backward
connected, “No Input Device Found”
through the tracks on the CD. For the Radio with CD (MP3) and
displays.
4 (Information): Press to display
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
track. 1. Press the softkey positioned
additional text information related to
the current song. If information is Press and hold, or press multiple under the RDM tab until Random
available, the song title information times, to continue moving forward Current Disc displays.
displays on the top line of the through the tracks on the CD. 2. Press the softkey again to turn
display and artist information s REV (Fast Reverse): Press off random play.
displays on the bottom line. When and hold to reverse playback quickly
information is not available, NO within a track.
INFO displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.
MP3‐Supported Files CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported File Order of Play

and Folder Structure Compressed audio files are
The Radio with CD (MP3) and
Radio with USB and CD (MP3) have The radio supports: accessed in the following order:
the capability of playing an MP3 . Up to 50 folders. . Playlists (Px).
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Up to 8 folders in depth. . Files stored in the root directory.
Format . Up to 50 playlists. . Files stored in folders in the root
Radios that have the capability of directory.
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
. Up to 255 files.
files that were recorded onto a . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl Tracks are played in the following
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can extension. order:
be recorded with the following fixed . Play begins from the first track in
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, the first playlist and continues
file extension.
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, sequentially through all tracks in
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, Root Directory each playlist. When the last
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or The root directory is treated as a track of the last playlist has
a variable bit rate. folder. Files are stored in the root played, play continues from the
directory when the disc or storage first track of the first playlist.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs device does not contain folders. . Play begins from the first track in
Files accessed from the root the first folder and continues
The radio can play discs that
directory of a CD display as sequentially through all tracks in
contain both uncompressed CD
F1 ROOT. each folder. When the last track
audio and MP3 files. If both
of the last folder has played,
formats are on the disc, the radio Empty Folder
play continues from the first
reads all MP3 files first, then the
Folders that do not contain files are track of the first folder.
uncompressed CD audio files.
skipped, and the player advances to
the next folder that contains files.
File System and Naming Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls displays on the bottom line. When
The song name that displays is the file extension and are stored on a information is not available, NO
song name that is contained in the USB device may be supported by INFO displays.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not the radio with a USB port. f (Tune): Turn to select MP3's on
present in the ID3 tag, then the Playlists can be changed by using the CD currently playing.
radio displays the file name without the softkeys below the S c and © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the extension (such as .mp3) as the c T tabs, the f knob, the the track, if more than 10 seconds
track name. © SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEK have played. Press and hold or
Track names longer than 32 button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW press multiple times to continue
characters or four pages are that has been recorded without moving backward through tracks.
shortened. The display does not using file folders can be played. If a
show parts of words on the last CD-R or CD-RW contains more than ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
the maximum of 50 folders, track. Press and hold or press
page of text and the extension of multiple times to continue moving
the file name is not displayed. 15 playlists, and 512 folders and
forward through tracks.
files, the player allows access and
Preprogrammed Playlists navigates up to the maximum, but s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
CDs that have preprogrammed all items over the maximum are not to reverse playback quickly. Sound
playlists reated using WinAmp™, accessible. is heard at a reduced volume and
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ the elapsed time of the file displays.
Playing an MP3
software can be accessed; however, Release s REV to resume playing.
there is no playlist‐editing capability 4 (Information): Press to display
using the radio. These playlists are additional text information related to
treated as special folders containing the current song. If information is
compressed audio song files. available, the song title information
displays on the top line of the
display and artist information
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
and hold to advance playback softkey below the h tab to play
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced the files in order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below
volume and the elapsed time of the the Sort By tab.
The player scans the disc to sort the
file displays. Release \ FWD to 2. Press one of the softkeys below
files by artist and album ID3 tag
resume playing. The elapsed time of information. It can take several the Album tab from the sort
the file displays. minutes to scan the disc depending screen.
S c (Previous Folder): Press on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the
the softkey below the S c tab to The radio may begin playing while it Back tab to return to the main
go to the first track in the previous is scanning in the background. music navigator screen.
folder. When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
c T (Next Folder): Press the begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows,
artist. The current artist playing is
softkey below the c T tab to go to and songs from the current album
shown on the second line of the begin to play. Once all songs from
the first track in the next folder. display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player
RDM (Random): Press to listen to are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
tracks in random, rather than next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and
sequential order. To use random, do begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3's from that
one of the following: To listen to files by another artist, album.
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and press the softkey located below To exit music navigator mode, press
Radio with USB and CD (MP3): either arrow tab. The disc goes to the softkey below the Back tab to
the next or previous artist in return to normal MP3 playback.
1. Press the softkey positioned
alphabetical order. Continue
under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays. pressing either softkey below the
arrow tab until the desired artist
2. Press the softkey again to turn displays.
off random play.
CD Player Messages If any error occurs repeatedly or if To use a portable audio player,
an error cannot be corrected, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
CHECK DISC: If this message
contact your dealer. If the radio the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
displays and/or the CD ejects, it
displays an error message, write it When a device is connected, press
could be for one of the following
down and provide it to your dealer the radio CD/AUX button to begin
reasons:
when reporting the problem. playing audio from the device over
. It is very hot. When the the vehicle speakers.
temperature returns to normal, Auxiliary Devices For optimal sound quality, increase
the CD should play.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack the portable audio device's volume
. The road is very rough. When to the loudest level.
the road becomes smoother, the Radios with an auxiliary input jack
It is always best to power the
CD should play. located on the lower right side of the
portable audio device through its
faceplate can connect to an external
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, own battery while playing.
audio device such as an iPod®,
or upside down.
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise
. The air is very humid. If so, wait another source for audio listening. or counterclockwise to increase
about an hour and try again. This input jack is not an audio or decrease the volume of the
. There was a problem while output; do not plug headphones into portable player. Additional volume
burning the CD. the front auxiliary input jack. adjustments might have to be made
from the portable device if the
. The label is caught in the CD Drivers are encouraged to set up
volume is not loud or soft enough.
player. any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See BAND: Press to listen to the radio
If the CD is not playing correctly, for Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 for when a portable audio device is
any other reason, try a known more information on driver playing. The portable audio device
good CD. distraction. continues playing.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to USB Support Not all iPods and USB drives are
play a CD when a portable audio compatible with the USB port.
device is playing. Press again and Make sure the iPod has the latest
the system begins playing audio firmware from Apple® for proper
from the connected portable audio operation. iPod firmware can be
player. If a portable audio player is updated using the latest iTunes®
not connected, “No Input Device application. See www.apple.com/
Found” displays. itunes.
Using the USB Port For help with identifying the iPod, go
Radios with a USB port can control to www.apple.com/support.
a USB storage device or an iPod® Radios that have a USB port can
using the radio buttons and knobs. play .mp3 and .wma files that are
See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player stored on a USB storage device as
on page 7‑12 for information about The USB connector is located on well as AAC files that are stored on
how to connect and control a USB the instrument panel and uses the an iPod.
storage device or an iPod. USB 2.0 standard.
USB‐Supported File and Folder
USB‐Supported Devices Structure
. USB flash drive The radio supports:
. Portable USB hard drive . Up to 700 folders
. Fifth generation or later iPod . Up to 8 folders in depth
. iPod nano . Up to 65,535 files.
. iPod touch . Folder and file names up to
64 bytes
. iPod classic

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file appears on the radio display. The Using the Radio to Control a
extension iPod music appears on the radio’s USB Storage Device or iPod
. AAC files stored on an iPod display and begins playing.
The radio can control a USB
. FAT16 The iPod charges while it is storage device or an iPod using the
connected to the vehicle if the radio buttons and knobs, and
. FAT32 vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY display song information on the
Connecting a USB Storage or ON/RUN position. When the radio’s display.
Device or iPod® vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not f (Tune): Turn to select files.
The USB port can be used to charge or draw power from the © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
control an iPod or a USB storage vehicle's battery. the track, if more than 10 seconds
device. have played. Press and hold or
If you have an older iPod model that
To connect a USB storage device, is not supported, it can still be used press multiple times to continue
connect the device to the USB port by connecting it to the auxiliary moving backward through tracks.
located in the center console or on input jack using a standard 3.5 mm ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
the instrument panel. (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the track. Press and hold or press
To connect an iPod, connect one Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more multiple times to continue moving
end of the USB cable that came information. forward through tracks.
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
connector and connect the other to reverse playback quickly. Sound
end to the USB port located in the is heard at a reduced volume.
center console or on the instrument
Release s REV to resume playing.
panel. If the vehicle is on and the
The elapsed time of the file
USB connection works, “OK to
displays.
disconnect” and a GM logo may
appear on the iPod, and iPod
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey below 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
and hold to advance playback j to pause the track. The tab in the selected folder.
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced appears raised when pause is being
5. Press f to select the desired file
volume. Release \ FWD to used. Press the softkey below j
to be played.
resume playing. The elapsed time of again to resume playback.
the file displays. To skip through large lists, the five
Back: Press the softkey below the
softkeys can be used to navigate in
4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main
the following order:
additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the
selected track. root directory on a USB storage . First softkey, first item in the list.
device. . Second softkey, 1% through the
Using Softkeys to Control a
USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the list each time the softkey is
softkey below c to view the pressed.
The five softkeys below the radio
contents of the current folder on the . Third softkey, 5% through the list
display are used to control the
USB drive. To browse and select each time the softkey is pressed.
functions listed below.
files: .
To use the softkeys: Fourth softkey, 10% through the
1. Press the softkey below c. list each time the softkey is
1. Press the first or fifth softkey pressed.
below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
display the functions listed
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
of folders.
below, or press the softkey
below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the desired
currently displayed. folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
2. Press the softkey below the tab the desired folder is reached.
with the function on it to use that
function.
h (Music Navigator): Press the 4. Turn f to scroll through the Repeat Functionality
softkey below h to view and folders or files in the To use Repeat:
select a file on an iPod, using the selected menu.
iPod's menu system. Files are Press the softkey below " or '
5. Press f to select the desired file to select between Repeat All and
sorted by:
to be played. Repeat Track.
. Playlists
To skip through large lists, the five " (Repeat All): Press the softkey
. Artists softkeys can be used to navigate in below " to repeat all tracks. The
. Albums the following order: tab appears lowered when Repeat
. Genres
. First softkey, first item in the list. All is being used. This is the default
. Second softkey, 1% through the mode when a USB storage device
. Songs or iPod is first connected.
list each time the softkey is
. Composers pressed. ' (Repeat Track): Press the
To select files: . Third softkey, 5% through the list softkey below ' to repeat one
each time the softkey is pressed. track. The tab appears raised when
1. Press the softkey below h. Repeat Track is being used.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list list each time the softkey is
of menus. pressed.
3. Press f to select the . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
desired menu.
Shuffle Functionality Phone To minimize driver distraction,

To use Shuffle: before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
Press the softkey below >, 2, Bluetooth . Become familiar with the
<, or = to select between For vehicles equipped with features of the cell phone.
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ Bluetooth capability, the system can Organize the phone book and
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, interact with many cell phones, contact lists clearly and delete
or Shuffle Folder. allowing: duplicate or rarely used entries.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the . Placement and receipt of calls in If possible, program speed dial
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle a hands-free mode. or other shortcuts.
off. This is the default mode when a . Sharing of the cell phone’s . Review the controls and
USB storage device or iPod is first address book or contact list with operation of the infotainment and
connected. the vehicle. navigation system.
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle . Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Songs): Press the softkey below The system may not work with
= or < to shuffle all songs on all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
the USB storage device or iPod. this section for more information.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the . If the cell phone has voice
softkey below > to shuffle all dialing capability, learn to use
songs in the current album on that feature to access the
an iPod. address book or contact list. See
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the for more information.
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a USB
storage device.

. See “Storing and Deleting Phone system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth Audio System
Numbers” in this section for for more information on compatible
more information. When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
phones.
system, sound comes through the
Voice Recognition vehicle's front audio system
{ WARNING speakers and overrides the audio
The Bluetooth system uses voice system. Use the audio system
When using a cell phone, it can recognition to interpret voice
be distracting to look too long or volume knob, during a call, to
commands to dial phone numbers change the volume level. The
too often at the screen of the and name tags. adjusted volume level remains in
phone or the infotainment
For additional information, say memory for later calls. To prevent
(navigation) system. Taking your
“Help” while you are in a voice missed calls, a minimum volume
eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu. level is used if the volume is turned
often could cause a crash down too low.
resulting in injury or death. Focus Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
your attention on driving. a minimum. The system may not Bluetooth Controls
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise. Use the buttons located on the
A Bluetooth system can use a steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a When to Speak: A short tone in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See
Hands‐Free Profile to make and sounds after the system responds Steering Wheel Controls on
receive phone calls. The system indicating when it is waiting for a page 5‑2 for more information.
can be used while the key is in the voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak. b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY answer incoming calls, confirm
position. The range of the Bluetooth How to Speak: Speak clearly in a system information, and start
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). calm and natural voice. speech recognition.
Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed c / x (Phone On Hook): Press
to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth to end a call, reject a call, or cancel
an operation.
Pairing
. Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the pairing process on the
be connected to the Bluetooth cell phone that you want to pair.
A Bluetooth cell phone must be system at a time. For help with this process, see
paired to the Bluetooth system and . If multiple paired cell phones are the cell phone manufacturer's
then connected to the vehicle before
within range of the system, the user guide.
it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for system connects to the first 5. Locate the device named “Your
Bluetooth functions before pairing available paired cell phone in the Vehicle” in the list on the cell
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone order that they were first paired phone. Follow the instructions
is not connected, calls will be made to the system. To connect to a on the cell phone to enter the
using OnStar Hands‐Free Calling, different paired phone, see PIN that was provided in Step 3.
if equipped. Refer to the OnStar “Connecting to a Different After the PIN is successfully
Owner's Guide for more information. Phone” later in this section. entered, the system prompts you
Pairing a Phone to provide a name for the paired
Pairing Information cell phone. This name will be
. Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b / g for used to indicate which phones
paired to the Bluetooth system. two seconds. are paired and connected to the
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
. The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
and Connected Phones” later in
when the vehicle is moving. 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds this section for more information.
. Pairing only needs to be with instructions and a four‐digit
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
completed once, unless the Personal Identification Number
additional phones.
pairing information on the cell (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone
Phones To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers
The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the 30 phone numbers as name tags in
also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell the Hands‐Free Directory that is
system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on shared between the Bluetooth and
after that phone name. which cell phone you want to OnStar systems, if equipped.
connect to, you may have to use
1. Press and hold b / g for this command several times. The following commands are used
two seconds. to delete and store phone numbers.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
1. Press and hold b / g for Store: This command will store a
two seconds. phone number, or a group of
3. Say “List.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” numbers as a name tag.
Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say “Change phone.” Digit Store: This command allows
If the phone name you want to a phone number to be stored as a
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see “Listing All name tag by entering the digits one
found, the response will be
Paired and Connected Phones.” at a time.
“<Phone name> is now
1. Press and hold b / g for connected.” Delete: This command is used to
two seconds. delete individual name tags.
. If another cell phone is not
2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone Delete All Name Tags: This
remains connected. command deletes all stored name
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks tags in the Hands‐Free Calling
which phone to delete. Directory and the OnStar
4. Say the name of the phone you Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
want to delete. if equipped.
Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time, To delete all name tags:
that you want to store. After
1. Press and hold b / g for each digit is entered, the system 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard two seconds.
2. Say “Store.” followed by a tone. After the last 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
digit has been entered, say
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the Listing Stored Numbers
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
at once with no pauses, then The list command will list all stored
save a name tag for this number. numbers and name tags.
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command Using the “List” Command
this number.
1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press and hold b / g for
Using the “Digit Store” Command two seconds. two seconds.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.” 2. Say “Directory.”
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say the name tag you want to 3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
number. delete.
4. Say “List.”
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command Making a Call
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored Calls can be made using the
name tags in the Hands‐Free following commands.
1. Press and hold b / g for Calling Directory and the OnStar
two seconds. Dial or Call: The dial or call
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory, command can be used
2. Say “Digit Store.” if equipped. interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is Using the “Re‐dial” Command
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the last 1. Press and hold b / g for
number. two seconds.
Re‐dial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
phone. recognized by the system, say Once connected, the person called
“Verify” at any time. will be heard through the audio
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
speakers.
Command 1. Press and hold b / g for
1. Press and hold b / g for two seconds. Receiving a Call
two seconds. 2. Say “Digit Dial.” When an incoming call is received,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, the audio system mutes and a ring
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
that you want to dial. After each tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing, or say the name tag.
. Press b / g to answer the call.
repeats back the digit it heard
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the last . Press c / x to ignore a call.
will be heard through the audio digit has been entered,
speakers. say “Dial.” Call Waiting
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called Call waiting must be supported on
will be heard through the audio the cell phone and enabled by the
The digit dial command allows a wireless service carrier.
speakers.
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time. . Press b / g to answer an
After each digit is entered, the incoming call when another call
system repeats back the digit it is active. The original call is
heard followed by a tone. placed on hold.
. Press b / g again to return to Ending a Call Transferring Audio from the

the original call. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Press c / x to end a call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call with the audio in the
action is required. Muting a Call vehicle:
. Press c / x to disconnect the During a call, all sounds from inside 1. Press b / g.
current call and switch to the call the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
on hold.
cannot hear them. Transferring Audio to the
Three‐Way Calling Bluetooth System from a Cell
. To mute a call, press b / g, and Phone
Three‐way calling must be then say “Mute call.”
supported on the cell phone and During a call with the audio on the
enabled by the wireless service . To cancel mute, press b / g,
cell phone, press b / g. The audio
carrier. and then say “Un‐mute call.”
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
1. While on a call, press b / g. Transferring a Call does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell
2. Say “Three‐way call.” Audio can be transferred between phone. See your cell phone
3. Use the dial or call command to the Bluetooth system and the cell manufacturer's user guide for more
dial the number of the third party phone. information.
to be called. The cell phone must be paired and
4. Once the call is connected, connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
press b / g to link all callers transferred. The connection process
together. can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Clearing the System

Voice pass‐thru allows access to the (DTMF) Tones Unless information is deleted out of
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as will be retained indefinitely. This
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can includes all saved name tags in the
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a phone book and phone pairing
To access contacts stored in the cell menu‐driven phone system. information. For information on how
phone: Account numbers can also be to delete this information, see the
stored for use. previous section “Deleting a Paired
1. Press and hold b / g for Sending a Number or Name Tag
Phone” and the previous sections
two seconds. on deleting name tags.
During a Call
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system Other Information
responds “Bluetooth ready,” 1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by The Bluetooth® word mark and
followed by a tone.
a tone. logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
3. Say “Voice.” The system SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
responds “OK, accessing 2. Say “Dial.” by General Motors is under license.
<phone name>.” 3. Say the number or name tag Other trademarks and trade names
The cell phone's normal prompt to send. are those of their respective owners.
messages will go through their cycle
according to the phone's operating
instructions.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control Temperature Control: Turn the

B. Temperature Control knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
C. Air Delivery Mode Control temperature inside the vehicle.
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to the knob clockwise or
increase or decrease the fan speed. counterclockwise to change the
9 (Off): Turns the system off. current airflow mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
8-2 Climate Controls
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided

between the instrument panel and
floor outlets, with some air directed
toward the windshield.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets with some air directed
to the windshield and side windows.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Outside
air is directed to the floor and
defroster outlets. Adjust the
temperature knob for warmer or Vehicles With Air Conditioning
cooler air. The air conditioning
compressor might turn on in this
setting to dehumidify the air.
A. Fan Control # (Air Conditioning): Cools and
B. Temperature Control dehumidifies the air inside of the
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the vehicle.
windshield of fog or frost more C. Air Delivery Mode Control
quickly. Air is directed to the
V (Maximum Air Conditioning):
D. Rear Window Defogger Cools the air inside the vehicle
windshield, with some to the floor
On hot days, open the windows to faster, by recirculating the inside air.
outlets and front side windows. The
air conditioning compressor might let hot inside air escape; then close Rear Window Defogger
turn on in this setting to dehumidify them. This helps to reduce the time
the air. needed for the vehicle to cool down For vehicles with a rear window
and the system operates more defogger, a warming grid is used to
Do not drive the vehicle until all the efficiently. remove fog or frost from the rear
windows are clear. window.
It only works when the ignition is in Rear Heating System 9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up
ON/RUN. or down to increase or decrease the
For vehicles with a rear heating
< (Rear Window Defogger): system, it lets you adjust the
amount of heated air sent to the
Press to turn the rear window rear-seating area.
amount of air flowing into the rear of
defogger on or off. the vehicle, from the front-seating Q (High): This position supplies the
The rear window defogger turns off area. This feature works with the most amount of heat to the
several minutes after the button is main climate-control system in the rear-seating area.
pressed. If turned on again, the vehicle. c (Medium): This position
defogger will run for several more supplies half the amount of heat to
minutes before turning off. The the rear‐seating area.
defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine. R (Low): This position supplies the
least amount of heat to the
Do not drive the vehicle until all the rear-seating area.
windows are clear.
9 (Off): Turns the rear heating
Notice: Do not use a razor blade system off.
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. AUX: The thumbwheel for this
system is located in the instrument
panel switchbank below the audio
system.
Rear Climate Control System

For vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it maintains the
temperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only.
It also works with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.
Front Climate Control Panel
A. Fan Control Use this control panel to maintain a

B. Air Delivery Mode Control separate temperature setting. Adjust
the direction of the airflow or adjust
C. Temperature Control the fan speed for the rear seat
passenger(s).
9 : Turns the system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed in the
rear-seating area.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
temperature in the
rear‐seating area.
The air-conditioning system on the
Rear Climate Control Panel main climate control panel must be
turned on to direct cooled air to the
A. Fan Control AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knob rear of the vehicle. If it is not on,
on the front climate control panel to then the temperature in the rear of
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
AUX to let rear seat passengers use the vehicle remains at cabin
C. Temperature Control the control panel in the rear seating temperature.
If the vehicle has a 343 cm (135 in) area. This disables the front control
wheelbase, a rear control panel for panel. To return control to the front
this system is located in the second panel, move the fan knob out
row behind the driver in the rear of of AUX.
the vehicle. The temperature, air
delivery mode, and the fan speed
can be adjusted for the rear seating
area by a rear seat passenger.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn Air Vents

clockwise or counterclockwise to
change the direction of the airflow in Use the outlets located near the
the rear seating area. center and on the sides of the
instrument panel to change the
To change the current mode, select
direction of airflow.
one of the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the Operation Tips
upper outlets, with some directed to . Clear away any ice, snow or
the floor outlets. leaves from the air inlets at the
2 (Floor): Air is directed to the base of the windshield that may
floor outlets. block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Be sure to keep the area under the
front seats clear of any objects so
. Use of non-GM approved hood
that the air inside of the vehicle can deflectors may adversely affect
circulate effectively. the performance of the system.
For information on how to use the
. Keep the path under the front
main climate control system, see seats clear of objects to help
Climate Control Systems on circulate the air inside of the
page 8‑1. For information on vehicle more effectively.
ventilation, see Air Vents on
page 8‑6.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Operating Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Engine Exhaust Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Driving Information Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Running the Vehicle While and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 California Fuel
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Automatic Transmission Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission (Six Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-44
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission (Four Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Filling a Portable Fuel
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Towing
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11 Drive Systems General Towing
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Brakes Driving Characteristics and
Starting and Operating Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17 Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Ride Control Systems Conversions and Add-Ons
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Add-On Electrical
Retained Accessory Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information Drunk Driving

{ WARNING
Defensive Driving Assume that other road users { WARNING
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
Defensive driving means “always Drinking and then driving is very
expect the unexpected.” The first drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate dangerous. Your reflexes,
step in driving defensively is to wear perceptions, attentiveness, and
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on what they might do and be ready.
In addition: judgment can be affected by even
page 3‑9. a small amount of alcohol. You
. Allow enough following can have a serious — or even
distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after
the driver in front of you.
drinking.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Do not drink and drive or ride with
Driver distraction can cause a driver who has been drinking.
collisions resulting in injury or Ride home in a cab; or if you are
possible death. These simple with a group, designate a driver
defensive driving techniques who will not drink.
could save your life.
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that Medical research shows that Braking

almost 40 percent of all motor alcohol in a person's system can
vehicle-related deaths involve make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on
alcohol. In most cases, these especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑23.
deaths are the result of someone spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception
who was drinking and driving. that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to
In recent years, more than drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is
deaths have been associated with being killed or permanently disabled reaction time.
the use of alcohol, with about is higher than if the person had not
250,000 people injured. been drinking. Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But that is
For persons under 21, it is against only an average. It might be less
the law in every U.S. state to drink Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as
alcohol. There are good medical, The following three systems two or three seconds or more with
psychological, and developmental help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition,
reasons for these laws. driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and
The obvious way to eliminate the accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do
leading highway safety problem is driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But
for people never to drink alcohol ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, a
and then drive. than the tires and road can provide. vehicle moving at 100 km/h
Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That
vehicle. could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
space between the vehicle and
affect vehicle performance. See
others is important.
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while the Steering Tips
distances vary greatly with the vehicle is being driven, brake
It is important to take curves at a
surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the
reasonable speed.
pavement or gravel; the condition of brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push Traction in a curve depends on the
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there will condition of the tires and the road
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; still be some power brake assist but surface, the angle at which the
and the amount of brake force it will be used when the brake is curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
applied. applied. Once the power assist is While in a curve, speed is the one
used up, it can take longer to stop factor that can be controlled.
Avoid needless heavy braking.
Some people drive in and the brake pedal will be harder If there is a need to reduce speed,
spurts — heavy acceleration to push. do it before entering the curve, while
followed by heavy braking — rather Adding non‐dealer accessories can the front wheels are straight.
than keeping pace with traffic. This affect vehicle performance. See Try to adjust the speed so you can
is a mistake. The brakes might not Accessories and Modifications on drive through the curve. Maintain a
have time to cool between hard page 10‑3. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
stops. The brakes will wear out accelerate until out of the curve, and
much faster with a lot of heavy Steering then accelerate gently into the
braking. Keeping pace with the straightaway.
traffic and allowing realistic following Power Steering
distances eliminates a lot of If power steering assist is lost
unnecessary braking. That means because the engine stops or the
better braking and longer brake life. power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery

There are times when steering can The vehicle's right wheels can drop
be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the
example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving.
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
The vehicle can perform very well in recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
emergencies like these. First apply positions, it can be turned a full
the brakes. See Braking on 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only
page 9‑3. It is better to remove as slightly below the pavement,
much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
collision. Then steer around the off the accelerator and then, if there
problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
is nothing in the way, steer so that
depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency the vehicle straddles the edge of the
situations are always possible is a pavement. Turn the steering wheel
good reason to practice defensive 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
driving at all times and wear safety one-eighth turn, until the right
belts properly.
front tire contacts the pavement The three types of skids correspond Of course, traction is reduced when
edge. Then turn the steering wheel to the vehicle's three control water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
to go straight down the roadway. systems. In the braking skid, the material is on the road. For safety,
wheels are not rolling. In the slow down and adjust your driving to
Loss of Control steering or cornering skid, too much these conditions. It is important to
speed or steering in a curve causes slow down on slippery surfaces
Let us review what driving experts tires to slip and lose cornering force. because stopping distance is longer
say about what happens when the And in the acceleration skid, too and vehicle control more limited.
three control systems — brakes, much throttle causes the driving
steering, and acceleration — do not While driving on a surface with
wheels to spin. reduced traction, try to avoid
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver If the vehicle starts to slide, ease sudden steering, acceleration,
has asked. your foot off the accelerator pedal or braking, including reducing
and quickly steer the way you want vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
In any emergency, do not give up. the vehicle to go. If you start gear. Any sudden changes could
Keep trying to steer and constantly steering quickly enough, the vehicle cause the tires to slide. You might
seek an escape route or area of may straighten out. Always be ready not realize the surface is slippery
less danger. for a second skid if it occurs. until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
Skidding recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
In a skid, a driver can lose control of on the road to make a mirrored
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid surface — and slow down when you
most skids by taking reasonable have any doubt.
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those Remember: Antilock brakes help
conditions. But skids are always avoid only the braking skid.
possible.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

Other Rainy Weather Tips
Rain and wet roads can reduce Besides slowing down, other wet
vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates weather driving tips include:
ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through . Allow extra following distance.
Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the
of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this
. Pass with caution.
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle . Keep windshield wiping
deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not equipment in good shape.
ignore police warnings and be . Keep the windshield washer fluid
{ WARNING very cautious about trying to drive reservoir filled.
through flowing water.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. . Have good tires with proper
They might not work as well in a tread depth. See Tires on
quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning page 10‑50.
pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Turn off cruise control.
lose control of the vehicle. can build up under the vehicle's
After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wet enough and you are going fast
wash, lightly apply the brake enough. When the vehicle is
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no
normally. contact with the road.
(Continued)
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads

{ WARNING
Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through
your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is
safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will have
and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in to do all the work of slowing down
Other driving tips include: good shape. and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, would then have poor braking or
. Keep interior temperature cool. tires, cooling system, and even none going down a hill. You
transmission. could crash. Always have the
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going engine running and the vehicle in
down steep or long hills. gear when going downhill.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING . Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
If you do not shift down, the
center of the road. Drive at
brakes could get so hot that they speeds that let you stay in your
would not work well. You would own lane.
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
. Top of hills: Be
crash. Shift down to let the engine alert — something could
assist the brakes on a steep be in your lane (stalled car,
downhill slope. accident).

. Pay attention to special road Drive with caution, whatever the Allow greater following distance on
signs (falling rocks area, winding condition. Accelerate gently so any slippery road and watch for
roads, long grades, passing or traction is not lost. Accelerating too slippery spots. Icy patches can
no-passing zones) and take quickly causes the wheels to spin occur on otherwise clear roads in
appropriate action. and makes the surface under the shaded areas. The surface of a
tires slick, so there is even less curve or an overpass can remain icy
Winter Driving traction. when the surrounding roads are
Try not to break the fragile traction. clear. Avoid sudden steering
Driving on Snow or Ice maneuvers and braking while
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
Drive carefully when there is snow wheels will spin and polish the on ice.
or ice between the tires and the surface under the tires even more. Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
road, creating less traction or grip. on slippery surfaces.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to on page 9‑35 improves vehicle
fall, resulting in even less traction. stability during hard stops on a
Avoid driving on wet ice or in slippery roads, but apply the brakes
freezing rain until roads can be sooner than when on dry pavement.
treated with salt or sand.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . Adjust the Climate Control
vehicle unless there is help nearby. system to a setting that
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside circulates the air inside the
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 13‑6. vehicle and set the fan speed
especially any that is blocking
To get help and keep everyone in to the highest setting. See
the exhaust pipe and/or the
the vehicle safe: Climate Control System in the
fuel operated heater exhaust
. Turn on the hazard warning Index.
system, if equipped. If the
flashers. vehicle has a diesel engine For more information about
. Tie a red cloth to an outside and a fuel operated heater, carbon monoxide, see Engine
mirror. see “Fuel Operated Heater Exhaust on page 9‑26.
(FOH)” in the diesel engine
supplement. Snow can trap exhaust gases
{ WARNING . Check again from time to
under the vehicle. This can cause
deadly CO (carbon monoxide)
Snow can trap engine exhaust time to be sure snow does gas to get inside. CO could
under the vehicle. This may not collect there. overcome you and kill you. You
cause exhaust gases to get . Open a window about 5 cm cannot see it or smell it, so you
inside. Engine exhaust contains (2 in) on the side of the might not know it is in the vehicle.
carbon monoxide (CO) which vehicle that is away from the Clear away snow from around the
cannot be seen or smelled. It can wind to bring in fresh air. base of the vehicle, especially
cause unconsciousness and even any that is blocking the exhaust.
. Fully open the air outlets on
death.
or under the instrument
(Continued) panel. Run the engine for short periods
(Continued) only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle Is Stuck
short periods as needed to warm { WARNING
the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the
off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high
the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and you
until help arrives but only when you or others could be injured. The
If the vehicle has a traction system,
feel really uncomfortable from the it can often help to free a stuck vehicle can overheat, causing an
cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's engine compartment fire or other
also helps. traction system in the Index. If stuck damage. Spin the wheels as little
too severely for the traction system as possible and avoid going
If it takes some time for help to
to free the vehicle, turn the traction above 55 km/h (35 mph).
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator system off and use the rocking
pedal slightly so the engine runs method. For information about using tire
faster than the idle speed. This chains on the vehicle, see Tire
keeps the battery charged to restart Chains on page 10‑71.
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits

it Out { WARNING
It is very important to know how
Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross
front wheels. Turn off any traction or Vehicle Weight Rating
vehicle capacity weight and
stability system. Shift back and forth (GVWR), or either the
between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
wear, wait until the wheels stop Two labels on the vehicle show This can cause systems to
spinning before shifting gears. how much weight it was break and change the way the
Release the accelerator pedal while designed to carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
shifting, and press lightly on the Loading Information label and cause loss of control and a
accelerator pedal when the the Certification/Tire label. crash. Overloading can also
transmission is in gear. Slowly shorten the life of the vehicle.
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the
vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.
Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum Steps for Determining Correct
Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in Load Limit
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement “The
The Tire and Loading combined weight of
Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should
size of the original equipment never exceed XXX kg or
tires (C) and the recommended XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
cold tire inflation pressures (D). placard.
For more information on tires 2. Determine the combined
and inflation see Tires on weight of the driver and
page 10‑50 and Tire Pressure passengers that will be riding
on page 10‑57. in your vehicle.
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Label Example
information on the vehicle weight of the driver and
A vehicle specific Tire and Certification/Tire label. It tells passengers from XXX kg or
Loading Information label is you the Gross Vehicle Weight XXX lbs.
attached to the center pillar Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
(B-pillar). With the driver door Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
open, you will find the label the front and rear axle. See
attached below the door lock “Certification/Tire Label” later in
post (striker). The tire and this section.
loading information label shows
the number of occupant seating
4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing

the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your
and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to
For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this
amount equals 1400 lbs and manual to determine how this
there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo
passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity of
the amount of available cargo your vehicle. See Trailer
and luggage load capacity is Towing on page 9‑52 for
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) important information on
= 650 lbs). towing a trailer, towing safety
5. Determine the combined rules and trailering tips. Example 1
weight of luggage and cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
being loaded on the vehicle. Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
That weight may not safely B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
exceed the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
and luggage load capacity (300 lbs)
calculated in Step 4. C. Available Occupant and Cargo
Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
Refer to the vehicle tire and

loading information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity
Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ (1,000 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
(750 lbs) 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
C. Available Cargo Weight = (1,000 lbs)
113 kg (250 lbs) C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs)
Certification/Tire Label The Certification/Tire label also If there is a heavy load, it should
tells you the maximum weights be spread out.
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating { WARNING
(GAWR). To find out the actual
loads on the front and rear Do not load the vehicle any
axles, you need to go to a weigh heavier than the Gross
station and weigh the vehicle. Vehicle Weight Rating
Your dealer can help you with (GVWR), or either the
this. Be sure to spread out the maximum front or rear Gross
load equally on both sides of the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
centerline. This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle handles. This could
A vehicle specific Certification/ vehicle, or the GAWR for either
Tire label is found on the rear cause loss of control and a
the front or rear axle. crash. Overloading can also
edge of the driver door. The
label shows the size of the shorten the life of the vehicle.
vehicle's original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to
obtain the gross weight capacity
of the vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) Starting and

. When you carry something Operating
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure inside the vehicle, secure
it whenever you can. New Vehicle Break-In
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash. . Do not leave a seat folded Notice: The vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
. Put things in the cargo down unless you need to. will perform better in the long run
area of the vehicle. Try to if you follow these guidelines:
spread the weight evenly. Add-On Equipment . Keep the vehicle speed at
. Never stack heavier When you carry removable 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for
things, like suitcases, items, you may need to put a the first 805 km (500 miles).
inside the vehicle so that limit on how many people you . Do not drive at any one
some of them are above carry inside the vehicle. Be sure constant speed, fast or slow,
the tops of the seats. to weigh the vehicle before you for the first 805 km
buy and install the new (500 miles). Do not make
. Do not leave an full-throttle starts. Avoid
unsecured child restraint equipment.
downshifting to brake or
in the vehicle. slow the vehicle.
(Continued)

. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Ignition Positions A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
so. During this time the new stopped, turn the ignition switch to
brake linings are not yet LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
broken in. Hard stops with Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
new linings can mean will remain active. See Retained
premature wear and earlier Accessory Power (RAP) on
replacement. Follow this page 9‑23.
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake This position locks the ignition and
linings. transmission.
. Do not tow a trailer during Do not turn the engine off when the
break-in. See Trailer Towing vehicle is moving. This will cause a
on page 9‑52 for the trailer loss of power assist in the brake
towing capabilities of the and steering systems and disable
vehicle and more The ignition switch has four different the airbags.
information. positions. In an emergency, if the vehicle must
Following break‐in, engine speed To shift out of P (Park), the ignition be shut off while driving:
and load can be gradually must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ 1. Brake using a firm and steady
increased. ACCESSORY and the regular brake pressure. Do not pump the
pedal applied. brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). 5. If the vehicle must be shut off If you leave the key in the ACC/
This can be done while the while driving, turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
vehicle is moving. After shifting ACC/ACCESSORY. with the engine off, the battery could
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the Notice: Using a tool to force the be drained. You may not be able to
brakes and steer the vehicle to a key to turn in the ignition could start the vehicle if the battery is
safe location. cause damage to the switch or allowed to drain for an extended
3. Come to a complete stop, shift break the key. Use the correct period of time.
to P (Park), and turn the ignition key, make sure it is all the way in, D (START): This is the position that
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with and turn it only with your hand. starts the engine. When the engine
an automatic transmission, the If the key cannot be turned by starts, release the key. The ignition
shift lever must be in P (Park) to hand, see your dealer. switch returns to ON/RUN for
turn the ignition switch to the B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the driving.
LOCK/OFF position. position in which you can operate A warning tone will sound when the
4. Set the parking brake. See things like the radio and the driver door is opened, the ignition is
Parking Brake on page 9‑36. windshield wipers when the engine in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
is off. and the key is in the ignition.
{ WARNING C (ON/RUN): This position can be
used to operate the electrical
Turning off the vehicle while accessories and to display some
moving may cause loss of power instrument panel cluster warning
assist in the brake and steering and indicator lights. The switch
systems and disable the airbags. stays in this position when the
While driving, only shut the engine is running.
vehicle off in an emergency.
Starting the Engine The vehicle has a When the Low Fuel warning
Computer-Controlled Cranking lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, System. This feature assists in LOW message is displayed in
see the Duramax diesel supplement starting the engine and protects the Driver Information Center
for more information. components. If the ignition key is (DIC), the Computer‐Controlled
To place the transmission in the turned to the START position, Cranking System is disabled to
proper gear: and then released when the prevent possible vehicle
engine begins cranking, the component damage. When this
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or engine will continue cranking for happens, hold the ignition switch
N (Neutral). The engine will not start a few seconds or until the in the START position to
in any other position. To restart the vehicle starts. If the engine does continue engine cranking.
engine when the vehicle is already not start and the key is held in
moving, use N (Neutral) only. Notice: Cranking the engine for
START for many seconds, long periods of time, by returning
Starting Procedure cranking will be stopped after the key to the START position
15 seconds to prevent cranking immediately after cranking has
1. With your foot off the accelerator motor damage. To prevent gear
pedal, turn the ignition key to ended, can overheat and damage
damage, this system also the cranking motor, and drain the
START. When the engine starts, prevents cranking if the engine
let go of the key. The idle speed battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
is already running. Engine between each try, to let the
will go down as your engine gets cranking can be stopped by
warm. Do not race the engine cranking motor cool down.
turning the ignition switch to the
immediately after starting it. ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
Operate the engine and OFF position.
transmission gently to allow the
oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed This system can be used to
5‐10 seconds, especially in very to work with the electronics in increase engine idle speed
cold weather (below −18°C the vehicle. If you add electrical whenever the following conditions
or 0°F), it could be flooded with parts or accessories, you could are met:
too much gasoline. Try pushing change the way the engine . The park brake is set.
the accelerator pedal all the way operates. Before adding electrical
to the floor and holding it there equipment, check with your . The brake pedal is not pressed.
as you hold the key in START dealer. If you do not, the engine . The vehicle must not be moving
for up to 15 seconds. Wait at might not perform properly. Any and the accelerator must not be
least 15 seconds between each resulting damage would not be pressed.
try, to allow the cranking motor covered by the vehicle warranty.
to cool down. When the engine To control the fast idle:
starts, let go of the key and Fast Idle System . To enable the Fast Idle System,
accelerator. If the vehicle starts press and release the Cruise
briefly but then stops again, do If the vehicle has this feature it is
Control On/Off button and
the same thing. This clears the available only with cruise control.
ensure that the switch LED is lit.
extra gasoline from the engine. The manual fast idle switch is
Do not race the engine operated using the cruise control . Press and release the Cruise
immediately after starting it. buttons located on the left hand side Control Set switch. Engine
Operate the engine and of the steering wheel. speed will be held at
transmission gently until the oil approximately 1200 RPM.
warms up and lubricates all When the fast idle is active the
moving parts. Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display “FAST IDLE ON.”
One of the following actions will turn Engine Heater To Use the Engine Coolant
off the fast idle: Heater
. Pressing the brake. see the Duramax diesel supplement 1. Turn off the engine.
. Selecting the Cruise Control for more information. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the
Cancel button. The engine coolant heater can electrical cord.
. Releasing the Parking Brake. provide easier starting and better The cord for the engine coolant
fuel economy during engine heater is located on the driver
. The transmission shifter is warm‐up in cold weather conditions
moved out of P (Park) or side of the engine compartment
at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles and is attached to the hose for
N (Neutral).
with an engine coolant heater the power steering reservoir.
. Selecting the Cruise Control On/ should be plugged in at least four
Off button when it was hours before starting. An internal 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
previously on. thermostat in the plug-end of the 110-volt AC outlet.
. Pressing the Cruise Control Set cord may exist which will prevent
switch a second time. engine coolant heater operation at
temperatures above −18°C (0°F).
. Pressing the accelerator greater
than a quarter of the down.
. Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
Retained Accessory Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING Power (RAP)
Plugging the cord into an These vehicle accessories can be { WARNING
ungrounded outlet could cause an used for up to 10 minutes after the
electrical shock. Also, the wrong It can be dangerous to get out of
engine is turned off: the vehicle if the shift lever is not
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
. Audio System fully in P (Park) with the parking
could be seriously injured. Plug . Power Windows (if equipped) brake firmly set. The vehicle can
the cord into a properly grounded roll. If you have left the engine
These features will work when the running, the vehicle can move
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. ignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
If the cord will not reach, use a suddenly. You or others could be
ACCESSORY. Once the key is injured. To be sure the vehicle will
heavy-duty three-prong extension turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
cord rated for at least 15 amps. not move, even when you are on
power to the radio and power
fairly level ground, use the steps
windows will continue to work
10 minutes or until the driver door is that follow. If you are pulling a
4. Before starting the engine, be trailer, see Driving Characteristics
sure to unplug and store the opened.
and Towing Tips on page 9‑48.
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts
and prevent damage. 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake. See
The length of time the heater should
Parking Brake on page 9‑36.
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
area where you will be parking the by pulling the shift lever toward
vehicle for the best advice on this. you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to If you have to leave the vehicle with You may find it difficult to pull the
LOCK/OFF. the engine running, be sure the shift lever out of P (Park). This is
4. Remove the key and take it with vehicle is in P (Park) and the called torque lock. To prevent torque
you. If you can leave the vehicle parking brake is firmly set before lock, set the parking brake and then
with the ignition key in your you leave it. After you move the shift shift into P (Park) properly before
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). lever into P (Park), hold the regular you leave the driver seat. To find out
brake pedal down. Then, see if you how, see “Shifting Into Park”
Leaving the Vehicle With the can move the shift lever away from previously in this section.
Engine Running P (Park) without first pulling it toward When you are ready to drive, move
you. If you can, it means that the the shift lever out of P (Park) before
shift lever was not fully locked into
{ WARNING P (Park).
you release the parking brake.
It can be dangerous to leave the If torque lock does occur, you may
Torque Lock need to have another vehicle push
vehicle with the engine running.
If you are parking on a hill and you yours a little uphill to take some of
The vehicle could move suddenly
do not shift the vehicle into P (Park) the pressure from the parking pawl
if the shift lever is not fully in in the transmission, so you can pull
P (Park) with the parking brake properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the the shift lever out of P (Park).
firmly set. And, if you leave the
parking pawl in the transmission.
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
Shifting out of Park If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking over Things
battery or a battery with low voltage,
The vehicle has an automatic try charging or jump starting the
That Burn
transmission shift lock control battery. See Jump Starting on
system. You have to fully apply the
brakes before you can shift from
page 10‑84 for more information. { WARNING
P (Park) when the ignition is in ON/ To shift out of P (Park) use the Things that can burn could touch
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. See following: hot exhaust parts under the
Automatic Transmission (Six Speed) 1. Apply the brake pedal. vehicle and ignite. Do not park
on page 9‑27 or Automatic over papers, leaves, dry grass,
2. Turn the ignition to ACC/
Transmission (Four Speed) on or other things that can burn.
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
page 9‑31.
The shift lock control system is 3. Move the shift lever to the
designed to do the following: desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of
. Prevent the ignition key from
being removed unless the shift P (Park):
lever is in P (Park). 1. Ease the pressure on the shift
. Prevent movement of the shift lever.
lever out of P (Park), unless the 2. While holding down the brake
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ pedal, push the shift lever all the
ACCESSORY and the regular way into P (Park).
brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the
The shift lock control system is desired position.
always functional except in the case If you are still having a problem
of a dead battery or low voltage shifting, have the vehicle serviced.
(less than 9 V) battery.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
{ WARNING . The exhaust system leaks If unusual fumes are detected or

due to corrosion or damage. if it is suspected that exhaust is
Engine exhaust contains carbon coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle exhaust system
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
has been modified, damaged . Drive it only with the windows
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO or improperly repaired. completely down.
can cause unconsciousness and
. There are holes or openings . Have the vehicle repaired
even death.
in the vehicle body from immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: damage or after market
Never park the vehicle with the
. The vehicle idles in areas modifications that are not
completely sealed. engine running in an enclosed
with poor ventilation (parking area such as a garage or a
garages, tunnels, deep snow (Continued) building that has no fresh air
that may block underbody
ventilation.
airflow or tail pipes).
. The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
Transmission
It is better not to park with the
the vehicle if the automatic
engine running. But if you ever have
transmission shift lever is not fully
Automatic Transmission
to, here are some things to know.
in P (Park) with the parking brake (Six Speed)
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
{ WARNING not leave the vehicle when the
Vehicles with a six speed automatic
transmission have a shift position
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you indicator within the instrument panel
area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the cluster.
dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can There are several different positions
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others for the shift lever.
contains carbon monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the
which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when
It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground,
and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and
engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park).
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure
Exhaust on page 9‑26. the vehicle will not move. See See “Range Selection Mode” under
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑23. Manual Mode on page 9‑33.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑48.
P (Park): This position locks the N (Neutral): In this position, the

rear wheels. It is the best position to WARNING (Continued) engine does not connect with the
use when starting the engine wheels. To restart when you are
because the vehicle cannot move always set the parking brake and already moving, use N (Neutral)
easily. When parked on a hill, move the shift lever to P (Park). only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the
especially when the vehicle has a See Shifting Into Park on vehicle is being towed.
heavy load, you might notice an page 9‑23. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See “Torque Lock” under and Towing Tips on page 9‑48.
{ WARNING
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑23 for Shifting into a drive gear while the
more information. R (Reverse): Use this gear to engine is running at high speed is
back up. dangerous. Unless your foot is
{ WARNING Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
It is dangerous to get out of the while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the You could lose control and hit
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully people or objects. Do not shift
in P (Park) with the parking brake transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle into a drive gear while the engine
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. is running at high speed.
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
Do not leave the vehicle when the after the vehicle is stopped.
engine is running unless you To rock the vehicle back and forth to
have to. If you have left the get out of snow, ice, or sand without
engine running, the vehicle can damaging the transmission, see If
move suddenly. You or others the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
(Continued)
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or D (Drive) can be used when towing In some cases, this could appear to
N (Neutral) with the engine a trailer, carrying a heavy load or be a delayed shift, however the
running at high speed may driving on steep hills. You might transmission is operating normally.
damage the transmission. The want to shift the transmission to a The transmission uses adaptive
repairs would not be covered by lower gear selection if the shift controls. Adaptive shift controls
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the transmission shifts too often. continually compares key shift
engine is not running at high Downshifting the transmission in parameters to pre-programmed
speed when shifting the vehicle. slippery road conditions could result ideal shifts stored in the
D (Drive): This position is for in skidding. See “Skidding” under transmissions computer. The
normal driving. It provides the best Loss of Control on page 9‑6. transmission constantly makes
fuel economy. If you need more The vehicle has a shift stabilization adjustments to improve vehicle
power for passing, and you are: feature that adjusts the transmission performance according to how the
. Going less than about 55 km/h shifting to the current driving vehicle is being used, such as with
(35 mph), push the accelerator conditions in order to reduce rapid a heavy load or when temperature
pedal about halfway down. upshifts and downshifts. This shift changes. During this adaptive shift
stabilization feature is designed to control process, shifting might feel
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
determine, before making an different as the transmission
more, push the accelerator all determines the best settings.
the way down. upshift, if the engine is able to
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing The shift quality of a new vehicle
By doing this, the vehicle shifts things such as vehicle speed, may not be ideal because the
down to the next gear and has throttle position, and vehicle load. Adaptive Shift Control process may
more power. If the shift stabilization feature not have determined the best
determines that a current vehicle settings for a particular shift or
speed cannot be maintained, the condition. Shift quality will improve
transmission does not upshift and with continued driving.
instead holds the current gear.
When temperatures are very cold, 2 (Second): This position reduces 1 (First): This position reduces
the transmission's gear shifting vehicle speed even more than vehicle speed without using the
could be delayed providing more 3 (Third) without using the brakes. brakes. You can use it for major/
stable shifts until the engine warms You can use 2 (Second) on hills. severe downgrades where the
up. Shifts could be more noticeable It can help control vehicle speed as vehicle would otherwise accelerate
with a cold transmission. This you go down steep mountain roads, due to steepness of grade. When
difference in shifting is normal. but then you would also want to use you shift to 1 (First) it provides the
M (Manual Mode): This position the brakes off and on. See “Range lowest gear appropriate to current
lets drivers select the range of gears Selection Mode” under Manual road speed and continues to
appropriate for current driving Mode on page 9‑33. downshift as the vehicle slows,
conditions. If the vehicle has this If you manually select 2 (Second) eventually downshifting to 1 (First)
feature, see “Range Selection in an automatic transmission, gear. The transmission can be held
Mode” under Manual Mode on the transmission will start in in 1 (First) gear using Range
page 9‑33. second gear. You can use this Selection Mode or the shift lever.
feature for reducing the speed of the See “Range Selection Mode” under
3 (Third): This position is also used Manual Mode on page 9‑33.
for normal driving. It reduces vehicle rear wheels when you are trying to
speed more than D (Drive) without start the vehicle from a stop on Notice: Spinning the tires or
using the brakes. You might choose slippery road surfaces. holding the vehicle in one place
3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when on a hill using only the
driving on hilly, winding roads, when accelerator pedal may damage
towing a trailer, so there is less the transmission. The repair will
shifting between gears and when not be covered by the vehicle
going down a steep hill. See “Range warranty. If you are stuck, do not
Selection Mode” under Manual spin the tires. When stopping on
Mode on page 9‑33. a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
Automatic Transmission Make sure the shift lever is fully in

(Four Speed)
{ WARNING P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
It is dangerous to get out of the transmission shift lock control
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully system. You must first press the
in P (Park) with the parking brake brake pedal before you can shift
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. from P (Park) with the ignition in
Do not leave the vehicle when the ON/RUN.
engine is running unless you If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
have to. If you have left the ease pressure on the shift lever and
There are several different positions engine running, the vehicle can push the shift lever all the way into
for your shift lever. move suddenly. You or others P (Park) as you maintain brake
P (Park): This position locks the could be injured. To be sure the application. Then move the shift
rear wheels. It is the best position to vehicle will not move, even when lever into another gear. See Shifting
use when you start the engine you are on fairly level ground, out of Park on page 9‑25.
because the vehicle cannot move always set the parking brake and R (Reverse): Use this gear to
easily. move the shift lever to P (Park). back up.
See Shifting Into Park on
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
page 9‑23. If you are pulling a
while the vehicle is moving
trailer, see Driving Characteristics forward could damage the
and Towing Tips on page 9‑48. transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or Downshifting the transmission in
get out of snow, ice or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine slippery road conditions could result
damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may in skidding. See “Skidding” under
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11. damage the transmission. The Loss of Control on page 9‑6.
N (Neutral): In this position, the repairs would not be covered by 3 (Third): This position is also used
engine does not connect with the the vehicle warranty. Be sure the for normal driving. However it
wheels. To restart the engine when engine is not running at high reduces vehicle speed more than
the vehicle is already moving, use speed when shifting the vehicle. D (Drive) without using the brakes.
N (Neutral) only. Also, use D (Drive): This position is for You might choose 3 (Third) instead
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is normal driving. It provides the best of D (Drive) when driving on hilly,
being towed. fuel economy. If you need more winding roads, when towing a trailer,
power for passing, and you are: so there is less shifting between
{ WARNING . Going less than about 55 km/h gears and when going down a
steep hill.
(35 mph), push the accelerator
Shifting into a drive gear while the pedal about halfway down. You should use 3 (Third) (or a lower
engine is running at high speed is gear as needed) when towing a
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
dangerous. Unless your foot is trailer to minimize heat build-up and
firmly on the brake pedal, the more, push the accelerator all
the way down. extend the life of the transmission.
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit You will shift down to the next
people or objects. Do not shift gear and have more power.
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
2 (Second): This position reduces Notice: Spinning the tires or To use this feature, do the following:
vehicle speed even more than holding the vehicle in one 1. Move the shift lever to
3 (Third) without using the brakes. place on a hill using only the M (Manual Mode).
You can use 2 (Second) on hills. accelerator pedal may damage
It can help control vehicle speed as the transmission. The repair will 2. Press the +/− buttons, located
you go down steep mountain roads, not be covered by the vehicle on the steering column shift
but then you would also want to use warranty. If you are stuck, do not lever, to select the desired range
the brakes off and on. spin the tires. When stopping on of gears for current driving
a hill, use the brakes to hold the conditions.
You may use this feature for
reducing torque to the rear wheels vehicle in place. When M (Manual Mode) is selected
when you are trying to start the a number displays in the DIC next to
vehicle from a stop on slippery road Manual Mode the M indicating the current gear.
surfaces. Range Selection Mode This number is the highest gear that
1 (First): This position reduces can be used. However, the vehicle
vehicle speed even more than can automatically shift to lower
2 (Second) without using the brakes. gears as it adjusts to driving
You can use it on very steep hills, conditions. This means that all
or in deep snow or mud. If the shift gears below that number are
lever is put in 1 (First) while the available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
vehicle is moving forward, the 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
transmission will not shift into first automatically shifted by the vehicle,
gear until the vehicle is going slowly The vehicle may have a Range but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until
enough. Selection Mode. The Range the +/− button located on the
Selection Mode helps control the steering column lever is used to
vehicle's transmission and vehicle change to the gear.
speed while driving down hill or
towing a trailer by letting you select
a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when Tow/Haul Mode the instrument panel. When tow/
Range Selection Mode is active. haul is on, a light on the instrument
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34. panel cluster will come on.
While using Range Selection Mode, See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul page 5‑24 for more information.
Mode can be used. Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under
Notice: Spinning the tires or Towing Equipment on page 9‑56 for
holding the vehicle in one place more information.
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage Grade Braking (Six Speed
the transmission. The repair will Automatic Transmission)
not be covered by the vehicle The Grade Braking shift modes can
warranty. If you are stuck, do not be activated by pressing the TOW/
spin the tires. When stopping on HAUL button on the instrument
a hill, use the brakes to hold the Vehicles with an automatic panel. While in Range Selection
vehicle in place. transmission have a Tow/Haul Mode, Grade Braking is deactivated
Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts allowing the driver to select a
Low Traction Mode the transmission shift pattern to desired range of gears.
Low Traction Mode can assist in reduce shift cycling, providing
increased performance, vehicle Grade Braking is only active while
vehicle acceleration when road
control, and transmission cooling the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
conditions are slippery. While the
when towing or hauling heavy loads. you are not in the Range Selection
vehicle is at a stop, select the
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
second gear range using Range Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off previously and Manual Mode on
Selection Mode. This will limit by pressing the button, located to page 9‑33 for more information on
torque to the wheels after it detects the right of the steering wheel on the Range Selection Mode. Grade
wheel slip, preventing the tires from
Braking assists in maintaining
spinning.
desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades by automatically Drive Systems Brakes

shifting to lower gears when the
driver desires to slow the vehicle by
applying the brake. This reduces All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
wear on the braking system and If the vehicle has this feature, System (ABS)
increases control of the vehicle. engine power is sent to all four This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
Also see Trailer Towing on wheels when extra traction is System (ABS), an advanced
page 9‑52 for more information. needed. This is like four-wheel electronic braking system that helps
drive, but there is no separate lever prevent a braking skid.
Cruise Grade Braking or switch to engage or disengage
(Six Speed Automatic the front axle. It is fully automatic, When the engine is started and the
Transmission) and adjusts itself as needed for road vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
conditions. checks itself. A momentary motor or
Cruise Grade Braking operates only clicking noise might be heard while
while Cruise Control is engaged in this test is going on, and it might
Tow/Haul Mode. Cruise Grade even be noticed that the brake
Braking assists in maintaining pedal moves a little. This is normal.
desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades in cruise control
by automatically shifting to lower
gears when the cruise set speed is
exceeded.
While in the Range Selection Mode,
Cruise Grade Braking is not
available. If there is a problem with ABS, this
See Manual Mode on page 9‑33. warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑24.
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard. ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help To set the parking brake, hold the
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best regular brake pedal, then push
on wheel speed and controls braking. down the parking brake pedal.
braking pressure accordingly.
If the ignition is on, the brake
Remember: ABS does not change system warning light will come on.
the time needed to get a foot up to
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal or always decrease
the regular brake pedal down. Pull
stopping distance. If you get too
the handle, located just above the
close to the vehicle in front of you,
parking brake pedal, with the
there will not be enough time to
parking brake symbol, to release the
apply the brakes if that vehicle
parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking Ride Control Systems The system may be heard or felt
brake is released, the brake system while it is working. This is normal
warning light will go off. and does not mean there is a
StabiliTrak® System problem with the vehicle. The
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake The vehicle may have a vehicle system should initialize before the
system and cause premature stability enhancement system called vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
wear or damage to brake system StabiliTrak. It is an advanced In some cases, it may take
parts. Verify that the parking computer controlled system that approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of
brake is fully released and the assists the driver with directional driving before the system initializes.
brake warning light is off before control of the vehicle in difficult
driving. driving conditions.
If you are towing a trailer and are StabiliTrak activates when the
parking on a hill, see Driving computer senses a discrepancy
Characteristics and Towing Tips on between the intended path and the
page 9‑48. direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one Press the StabiliTrak button once to
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the turn off the Traction Control System
driver with keeping the vehicle on (TCS). Press and hold the
the intended path. StabiliTrak button located on the
instrument panel for more than
When the vehicle is started and five seconds to turn off StabiliTrak
begins to move, the system and TCS.
performs several diagnostic checks
to insure there are no problems.
To turn on the StabiliTrak system, StabiliTrak System Operation

press the StabiliTrak button again.
The StabiliTrak system is normally
StabiliTrak will automatically turn
on, except when the system is
back on when the vehicle speed
initializing or has been disabled
exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). One
with the StabiliTrak button. The
chime is heard and the StabiliTrak
StabiliTrak system will automatically
The StabiliTrak light comes on the light will turn off.
activate to assist the driver in
instrument panel cluster when the When the StabiliTrak system has maintaining vehicle directional
system is turned off or requires been turned off, system noises may control in most driving conditions.
service. still be heard as a result of the When activated, the StabiliTrak
When StabiliTrak activates, the brake-traction control coming on. system may reduce engine power to
TCS/StabiliTrak light flashes on the It is recommended to leave the the wheels and apply braking to
instrument panel. This also occurs system on for normal driving individual wheels as necessary to
when TCS is activated. conditions, but it may be necessary assist the driver with vehicle
to turn the system off if the vehicle directional control. If cruise control
For more information, see is being used when StabiliTrak
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light on is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to activates, the cruise control
page 5‑24. automatically disengages. The
attempt to free it. See If the Vehicle
For your safety, the system can only Is Stuck on page 9‑11. cruise control can be re-engaged
be disabled when the vehicle speed when road conditions allow. See
is less than 32 km/h (20 mph). Three Cruise Control on page 9‑39.
chimes will be heard and the The StabiliTrak system may also
StabiliTrak light comes on. turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the
system. If the problem does not
clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, see your dealer for service.
Traction Control Operation Adding non‐dealer accessories can Cruise Control

affect the vehicle's performance.
TCS is part of the StabiliTrak
See Accessories and Modifications
system. TCS limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the
on page 10‑3 for more information. { WARNING
wheels and by applying brakes to Cruise control can be dangerous
each individual wheel as Locking Rear Axle where you cannot drive safely at
necessary . Vehicles with a locking rear axle can a steady speed. So, do not use
If the brake-traction control system give more traction on snow, mud, the cruise control on winding
activates constantly or if the brakes ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a roads or in heavy traffic.
have heated up due to high speed standard axle most of the time, but
when traction is low, this feature will Cruise control can be dangerous
braking, the brake-traction control on slippery roads. On such roads,
will be automatically disabled. The allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. fast changes in tire traction can
system will come back on after the
cause excessive wheel slip, and
brakes have cooled. This can take
you could lose control. Do not use
up to two minutes or longer
depending on brake usage. cruise control on slippery roads.
TCS may activate on dry or rough

roads or under conditions such as For vehicles with cruise control, a
heavy acceleration while turning or speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the more can be maintained without
transmission. When this a reduction keeping your foot on the
in acceleration may be noticed, or a accelerator. Cruise control does not
noise or vibration may be heard. work at speeds below about 40 km/h
This is normal. (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise
control is turned off.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the +RES (Resume/Accelerate): 3. Press the SET− button located
system begins to limit wheel spin, Press briefly to make the vehicle on the steering wheel and
cruise control will automatically resume to a previously set speed, release it.
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System or press and hold to accelerate. 4. Take your foot off the
on page 9‑37. When road conditions SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the accelerator.
allow the cruise control to be safely speed and activate cruise control or
used again, it can be turned press and hold to decelerate. Resuming a Set Speed
back on. If the cruise control is set at a
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
desired speed and then the brakes
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory. are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
Setting Cruise Control speed from memory.
If the cruise button is on when not in Once the vehicle speed reaches
use, it could get bumped and go into about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
cruise when not desired. Keep the press the +RES button on the
cruise control switch off when cruise steering wheel. The vehicle returns
is not being used. to the previous set speed and stays
The cruise control light on the there.
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the 1. Press the I button.
system on or off. The indicator light
is on when cruise control is on and 2. Get up to the desired speed.
turns off when cruise control is off.
Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts, Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control press the SET– button on the
steering wheel briefly. Each time There are three ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is this is done, the vehicle goes control:
already activated, about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. . To disengage cruise control,
. Press and hold the +RES button step lightly on the brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
Using Cruise Control . Press the [ on the steering
release it. Use the accelerator pedal to wheel.
increase the vehicle speed. When . To turn off the cruise control,
. To increase vehicle speed in
you take your foot off the pedal, the
small amounts, press the +RES press I on the steering wheel.
vehicle will slow down to the
button. Each time this is done,
previous set cruise speed. Erasing Speed Memory
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills The cruise control set speed is
Reducing Speed While Using How well the cruise control will work erased from memory if I is
Cruise Control on hills depends upon the vehicle pressed or if the vehicle is
speed, load, and the steepness of turned off.
If the cruise control system is
the hills. When going up steep hills,
already activated,
you might have to step on the
. Press and hold the SET– button accelerator pedal to maintain the
on the steering wheel until the vehicle speed. When going
desired lower speed is reached, downhill, you might have to brake or
then release it. shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
Fuel knock, might be heard when driving.

If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
For diesel engine vehicles, see at 87 octane or higher as soon as
“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in the possible. If heavy knocking is heard
Duramax Diesel Supplement. when using gasoline rated at
For Vehicles with gasoline engines, 87 octane or higher, the engine
please read this. needs service.
Gasoline Gasoline Specifications

Use of the recommended fuel (U.S. and Canada Only)
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help At a minimum, gasoline
keep the engine clean and maintain Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge should meet ASTM specification
optimum vehicle performance, we and a yellow fuel cap can use either D 4814 in the United States or CAN/
recommend the use of gasoline unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). Some gasolines contain an
Gasoline. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on octane-enhancing additive called
page 9‑44. For all other vehicles, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
Look for the TOP TIER label on the tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
use only the unleaded gasoline
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets against the use of gasolines
described under Recommended
enhanced detergency standards containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
Fuel on page 9‑42.
developed by auto companies. A list on page 9‑43 for additional
of marketers providing TOP TIER information.
Detergent Gasoline can be found at Recommended Fuel
www.toptiergas.com. Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives

Requirements Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
If the vehicle is certified to meet Never use leaded gasoline or any in the United States are now
California Emissions Standards, it is other fuel not recommended in the required to contain additives that
designed to operate on fuels that previous text on fuel. Costly repairs help prevent engine and fuel system
meet California specifications. See caused by use of improper fuel deposits from forming, allowing the
the underhood emission control would not be covered by the vehicle emission control system to work
label. If this fuel is not available in warranty. properly. In most cases, nothing
states adopting California Emissions should have to be added to the fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an However, some gasolines contain
Standards, the vehicle will operate auto club, or contact a major oil
satisfactorily on fuels meeting only the minimum amount of
company that does business in the additive required to meet U.S.
federal specifications, but emission country where you will be driving.
control system performance might Environmental Protection Agency
be affected. The malfunction regulations. To help keep fuel
indicator lamp could turn on and the injectors and intake valves clean
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. and avoid problems due to dirty
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on injectors or valves, look for gasoline
page 5‑20. If this occurs, return to that is advertised as TOP TIER
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
If it is determined that the condition TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
is caused by the type of fuel used, ensure gasoline meets enhanced
repairs might not be covered by the detergency standards developed by
vehicle warranty. the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can and a yellow fuel cap can use either
tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage For all other vehicles, use only the
System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the unleaded gasoline described under
gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 9‑42.
General Motors. It is available at Some gasolines that We encourage the use of E85 in
your dealer. are not reformulated for low vehicles that are designed to use it.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, emissions can contain an The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
such as ethers and ethanol, and octane-enhancing additive called fuel, meaning it is made from
reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn
available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops.
recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the
gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce
other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission
10% ethanol must not be used in control system performance. The
vehicles that were not designed for malfunction indicator lamp might
those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
Many service stations will not have To ensure quick starts in the E85 has less energy per liter
an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump wintertime, the E85 fuel must be (gallon) than gasoline, so you will
available. The U.S. Department of formulated properly for your climate need to refill the fuel tank more
Energy has an alternative fuels according to ASTM specification often when using E85 than when
website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ D 5798. If you have trouble starting you are using gasoline. See Filling
locator/stations/) that can help you on E85, it could be because the the Tank on page 9‑46.
find E85 fuel. Those stations that do E85 fuel is not properly formulated Notice: Some additives are not
have E85 should have a label for your climate. If this happens, compatible with E85 fuel and can
indicating ethanol content. Do not switching to gasoline or adding harm the vehicle's fuel system.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is gasoline to the fuel tank can Do not add anything to E85.
greater than 85%. improve starting. For good starting Damage caused by additives
At a minimum, E85 should meet and heater efficiency below 0°C would not be covered by the
ASTM Specification D 5798. By (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank vehicle warranty.
definition, this means that fuel should contain no more than
70% ethanol. It is best not to Notice: This vehicle was not
labeled E85 will have an ethanol designed for fuel that contains
content between 70% and 85%. alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch methanol. Do not use fuel
Filling the fuel tank with fuel containing methanol. It can
mixtures that do not meet ASTM fuels, it is recommended that you
add as much fuel as possible — do corrode metal parts in the fuel
specifications can affect driveability system and also damage plastic
and could cause the malfunction not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when
refueling. You should drive the and rubber parts. That damage
indicator lamp to come on. would not be covered under the
vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the vehicle warranty.
vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration.
Filling the Tank

{ WARNING
{ WARNING Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a If you spill fuel and then
fuel fire can cause bad injuries. something ignites it, you could be
To help avoid injuries to you and badly burned. This spray can
others, read and follow all the happen if the tank is nearly full,
instructions on the fuel pump and is more likely in hot weather.
island. Turn off the engine when Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel for any hiss noise to stop. Then
or when refueling the vehicle. Do unscrew the cap all the way.
not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is located
sparks, flames, and smoking behind a hinged fuel door on the
materials away from fuel. Do not driver side of the vehicle. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended top off or overfill the tank and wait a
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,
when refueling the vehicle. This is few seconds after you have finished
the fuel cap will be yellow and state
pumping before removing the
against the law in some places. that E85 or gasoline can be used.
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
Do not re-enter the vehicle while See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
surfaces as soon as possible. See
pumping fuel. Keep children away page 9‑44.
Exterior Care on page 10‑91.
from the fuel pump; never let To remove the fuel cap, turn it
children pump fuel. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
While refueling, hang the tethered the cap is fully installed. The
fuel cap from the hook on the diagnostic system can determine if
fuel door. the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued)
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑20.
Container
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
{ WARNING { WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
If a fire starts while you are Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be
refueling, do not remove the while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by electricity discharge from the complete.
shutting off the pump or by container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while
notifying the station attendant. vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
Leave the area immediately. and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone
and others: while pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel
cap, be sure to get the right type.
. Dispense fuel only into
Your dealer can get one for you. approved containers.
If you get the wrong type, it may . Do not fill a container while it
not fit properly. This may cause is inside a vehicle, in a
the malfunction indicator lamp to vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
light and may damage the fuel or on any surface other than
tank and emissions system. See the ground.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on (Continued)
page 5‑20.
vehicle such as a motor home, see

. Then, during the first 800 km
Towing Recreational Vehicle Towing on (500 mi) that a trailer is towed,
page 10‑88. do not drive over 80 km/h
General Towing (50 mph) and do not make starts
Information Driving Characteristics at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the
Only use towing equipment that has and Towing Tips vehicle wear in at the heavier
been designed for the vehicle. loads.
Contact your dealer or trailering Pulling a Trailer
dealer for assistance with preparing Here are some important points:
. Vehicles with an automatic
the vehicle for towing a trailer. transmissions can tow in
. There are many different laws, D (Drive). Shift the transmission
See the following trailer towing including speed limit restrictions, to a lower gear if the
information in this section: having to do with trailering. transmission shifts too often
. For information on driving while Make sure the rig will be legal, under heavy loads and/or hilly
towing a trailer, see “Driving not only where you live but also conditions.
Characteristics and where you will be driving.
A good source for this Three important considerations
Towing Tips.” have to do with weight:
information can be state or
. For maximum vehicle and trailer provincial police. . The weight of the trailer.
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
. Consider using a sway control. . The weight of the trailer tongue.
. For information on equipment to See “Hitches” in Towing
tow a trailer, see “Towing
. The weight on the vehicle's tires.
Equipment on page 9‑56.
Equipment.” Also see Tow/Haul later in this
. Do not tow a trailer at all during section for information about the
For information on towing a disabled the first 800 km (500 mi) the new
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on Tow/Haul button and the Tow/Haul
vehicle is driven. The engine, indicator light.
page 10‑88. For information on axle or other parts could be
towing the vehicle behind another damaged.
Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer hitch

WARNING (Continued) parts and attachments, safety
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the
or under the instrument trailer has electric brakes, start the
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
gases may collect at the rear of vehicle and trailer moving and then
the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control apply the trailer brake controller by
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that hand to be sure the brakes are
window is open. brings in only outside air and working. This checks the electrical
set the fan speed to the connection at the same time.
Engine exhaust contains carbon highest setting. See Climate During the trip, check occasionally
monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. to be sure that the load is secure,
seen or smelled. It can cause and that the lamps and any trailer
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death. brakes are still working.
carbon monoxide, see Engine
To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 9‑26.
a trailer:
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
. Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a certain
vehicle ahead as you would when
inspected for leaks and make amount of experience. Get to know
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
necessary repairs before the rig before setting out for the
This can help to avoid situations
starting a trip. open road. Get acquainted with the
that require heavy braking and
. Never drive with the liftgate, feel of handling and braking with the
sudden turns.
trunk/hatch, or rear-most added weight of the trailer. And
window open. always keep in mind that the vehicle
you are driving is now longer and
(Continued) not as responsive as the vehicle is
by itself.
Passing shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees brakes might have to be used so
or other objects. Avoid jerky or much that they would get hot and no
More passing distance is needed
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in longer work well.
when towing a trailer. Because the
advance. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed Turn Signals When Towing a Shift the transmission to a lower
vehicle before returning to the lane. Trailer gear if the transmission shifts too
often under heavy loads and/or hilly
Backing Up The arrows on the instrument panel conditions.
Hold the bottom of the steering flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up, When towing at high altitude on
wheel with one hand. Then, to move steep uphill grades, consider the
the trailer to the left, move that hand the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning, following: Engine coolant will boil at
to the left. To move the trailer to the a lower temperature than at normal
right, move your hand to the right. changing lanes or stopping.
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
Always back up slowly and, When towing a trailer, the arrows on immediately after towing at high
if possible, have someone the instrument panel flash for turns altitude on steep uphill grades, the
guide you. even if the bulbs on the trailer are vehicle may show signs similar to
burned out. For this reason you may engine overheating. To avoid this,
Making Turns think other drivers are seeing the let the engine run while parked,
Notice: Making very sharp turns signal when they are not. It is preferably on level ground, with the
while trailering could cause the important to check occasionally to automatic transmission in P (Park)
trailer to come in contact with the be sure the trailer bulbs are still for a few minutes before turning the
vehicle. The vehicle could be working. engine off. If the overheat warning
damaged. Avoid making very comes on, see Engine Overheating
sharp turns while trailering.
Driving on Grades
on page 10‑24.
When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a lower
wider turns than normal. Do this so gear before starting down a long or
the trailer will not strike soft steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
Parking on Hills 3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance When Trailer
place, release the brake pedal Towing
{ WARNING until the chocks absorb the load.
The vehicle needs service more
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then often when pulling a trailer. See this
Parking the vehicle on a hill with apply the parking brake and shift manual's Maintenance Schedule or
the trailer attached can be into P (Park). Index for more information. Things
dangerous. If something goes that are especially important in
5. Release the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move. trailer operation are automatic
People can be injured, and both Leaving After Parking on a Hill transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
the vehicle and the trailer can be lubricant, belts, cooling system and
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
damaged. When possible, always brake system. It is a good idea to
while you:
park the rig on a flat surface. inspect these before and during
1.1. Start the engine. the trip.
If parking the rig on a hill: 1.2. Shift into a gear. Check periodically to see that all
1. Press the brake pedal, but do 1.3. Release the parking brake. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
not shift the transmission into 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill or 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
into traffic if facing uphill. clear of the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks 4. Stop and have someone pick up

under the trailer wheels. and store the chocks.
Trailer Towing Notice: Pulling a trailer your passengers. So please read

improperly can damage the this section carefully before pulling a
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, vehicle and result in costly trailer.
see the Duramax® diesel repairs not covered by the vehicle
supplement for more information. warranty. To pull a trailer Weight of the Trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this How heavy can a trailer safely be?
{ WARNING section and see your dealer for
It depends on how the rig is used.
important information about
The driver can lose control when For example, speed, altitude, road
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
pulling a trailer if the correct grades, outside temperature and
To identify the trailering capacity of how much the vehicle is used to pull
equipment is not used or the
the vehicle, read the information in a trailer are all important. It can
vehicle is not driven properly. For “Weight of the Trailer” that appears depend on any special equipment
example, if the trailer is too later in this section. on the vehicle, and the amount of
heavy, the brakes may not work tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
well — or even at all. The driver Trailering is different than just
driving the vehicle by itself. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
and passengers could be later in this section for more
seriously injured. The vehicle may Trailering means changes in
handling, acceleration, braking, information.
also be damaged; the resulting
durability and fuel economy. Maximum trailer weight is calculated
repairs would not be covered by
Successful, safe trailering takes assuming only the driver is in the
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
correct equipment, and it has to be tow vehicle and it has all the
only if all the steps in this section used properly. required trailering equipment. The
have been followed. Ask your
The following information has many weight of additional optional
dealer for advice and information equipment, passengers and cargo in
about towing a trailer with the time-tested, important trailering tips
and safety rules. Many of these are the tow vehicle must be subtracted
vehicle. from the maximum trailer weight.
important for your safety and that of
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4.3L V6 3.42 1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
3.42
5.3L V8 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
3.73
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5.3L V8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
G1500 Passenger Van 2WD
5.3L V8 3.73 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
H1500 Passenger Van AWD
5.3L V8 3.73 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4.8L V8 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
6.0L V8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
6.0L V8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for our trailering ball closest to the vehicle. This will
information or advice, or write us at help reduce the effect of trailer
our Customer Assistance Offices. tongue weight on the rear axle.
See Customer Assistance Offices After loading the trailer, weigh
on page 13‑3 for more information. the trailer and then the tongue,
Weight of the Trailer Tongue separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is might be made by moving some
an important weight to measure items around in the trailer.
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross Trailering may be limited by the
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the vehicle's ability to carry tongue
curb weight of the vehicle, any weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
The trailer tongue weight (A) should the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
cargo carried in it, and the people
be 10 percent to 15 percent of the (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
who will be riding in the vehicle.
total loaded trailer weight (B), up to the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
If there are a lot of options,
a maximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) with Weight Rating). The effect of
equipment, passengers or cargo in
a weight carrying hitch. The trailer additional weight may reduce the
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
tongue weight (A) should be trailering capacity more than the
weight the vehicle can carry, which
10 percent to 15 percent of the total total of the additional weight.
will also reduce the trailer weight the
loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, It is important that the vehicle
maximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) with
the tongue load must be added to does not exceed any of its
a weight distributing hitch.
the GVW because the vehicle will ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
be carrying that weight, too. See Do not exceed the maximum Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 allowable tongue weight for the Weight. The only way to be sure it is
for more information about the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch not exceeding any of these ratings
vehicle's maximum load capacity. extension that will position the hitch is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Weight‐Distributing Hitches is ample room when turning to avoid
Tires and Weight Carrying Hitches contact between the trailer and the
bumper.
Be sure the vehicle tires are inflated
to the upper limit for cold tires. If the loaded trailer being pulled
These numbers can be found on the will weigh more than 2 270 kg
Certification label at the rear edge of (5,000 lbs), be sure to use a
the driver door, or see Vehicle Load properly mounted weight-distributing
Limits on page 9‑12. Make sure not hitch and sway control of the proper
to go over the GVW limit for the size. This equipment is very
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the important for proper vehicle loading
weight of the trailer tongue. If using and good handling when driving.
a weight distributing hitch, make Always use a sway control if the
sure not to go over the rear axle trailer will weigh more than these
limit before applying the weight limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway
distribution spring bars. controls.
A. Body to Ground Distance Will any holes need to be made in
Towing Equipment B. Front of Vehicle the body of the vehicle when a
trailer hitch is installed?
Hitches When using a weight-distributing
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so If using the wiring provided with the
It is important to have the correct factory-installed trailering package,
the distance (A) remains the same
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large both before and after coupling the no holes need to be made in the
trucks going by and rough roads are trailer to the tow vehicle. body of the vehicle. However, if an
a few reasons why the right hitch is aftermarket hitch is installed, holes
needed. If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
may need to be made in the body.
the bumper could be damaged in
sharp turns. Make sure there
If holes are made in the body, then Trailer Brakes If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, the
be sure to seal the holes later when seven-wire harness assembly with
A loaded trailer that weighs more
the hitch is removed. If the holes are connector is attached to a bracket
than 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs to
not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide on the hitch platform. In both cases,
have its own brake system that is
(CO) from the engine's exhaust can the seven-wire harness has a
adequate for the weight of the
get into the vehicle as well as dirt connector and includes a 30-amp
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
and water. See “Carbon Monoxide” feed wire.
the instructions for the trailer brakes
under Engine Exhaust on The seven-wire harness connector
so they are installed, adjusted and
page 9‑26. contains the following trailer circuits:
maintained properly.
Safety Chains . Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Trailer Wiring Harness
Always attach chains between the (10A fuse)**
The optional heavy-duty trailer
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the . White: Ground
wiring package includes a wiring
safety chains under the tongue of
harness, with a seven-pin connector . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
at the rear of the vehicle and a
from contacting the road if it . Dark Green: Right Rear Stop
four-wire harness assembly under
becomes separated from the hitch. and Turn Signal*
the driver side of the instrument
Always leave just enough slack so .
panel. The four-wire harness Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed
the rig can turn. Never allow safety
assembly comes without a (30A Fuse)
chains to drag on the ground.
connector. . Brown: Trailer Park Lamp
If the vehicle does not have a trailer Supply Voltage (15A fuse)**
hitch, the seven-wire harness . Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn
assembly with connector is taped Signal *
together and located in a frame
pocket at the driver side rear left
corner of the frame.
The four-wire harness (without Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is designed to be most

connector) contains the following effective when the vehicle and
This button is on the instrument
circuits: trailer combined weight is at least
panel, to the right of the steering
. Black: Ground 75 percent of the vehicle Gross
wheel.
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
. Red/White: Battery Feed Pressing this button turns on and off See “Weight of the Trailer” in Trailer
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal the tow/haul mode. Towing on page 9‑52. Tow/Haul is
most useful under the following
. Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp driving conditions:
Supply Voltage
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
* If the vehicle is a cutaway with large or heavy load through
trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will rolling terrain.
be shared for both left/stop trailer
turn and right/stop trailer turn
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
signals. However, the cutaway large or heavy load in stop and
This indicator light on the instrument
lighting connector will have a go traffic.
panel cluster comes on when the
10 amp fuse for each signal. tow/haul mode is on. . When pulling a heavy trailer or a
** If the vehicle is a cutaway with large or heavy load in busy
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will parking lots where improved low
when pulling a heavy trailer or a
be shared for trailer park lamps and speed control of the vehicle is
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
cutaway rear lighting connector park desired.
Mode on page 9‑34 for more
lamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will be information.
shared for trailer back-up lamps and
cutaway rear lighting connector
back-up lamps.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the
when lightly loaded or with no trailer vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
at all will not cause damage. Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
However, there is no benefit to the The vehicle has an airbag system.
selection of Tow/Haul when the Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
vehicle is unloaded. Such a
selection when unloaded may
Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
result in unpleasant engine and Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑41 and Adding
transmission driving characteristics electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑42.
Haul is recommended only when Some electrical equipment can
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or damage the vehicle and the
heavy load. damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24

Vehicle Care Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center High-Mounted
10-40
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26 Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-42
General Information Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-43
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
California Proposition Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-33 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-35 Engine Compartment Fuse
Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Vehicle Checks Floor Console Fuse
Doing Your Own Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Ignition Transmission Lock Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Park Brake and P (Park) Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36 Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11 Wiper Blade Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Automatic Transmission Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Fluid (4-Speed Bulb Replacement Tire Pressure Monitor
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Automatic Transmission Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Tire Pressure Monitor
Fluid (6-Speed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Front Turn Signal, Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-18 Sidemarker, and Parking Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information California Proposition

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. known to the State of California to
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 exhaust, many parts and systems,
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70 many fluids, and some component
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 wear by-products contain and/or
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 emit these chemicals.
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-81
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Perchlorate Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
Materials Requirements Modifications systems on the vehicle. Your GM
Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories or dealer can accessorize the vehicle
applications, such as airbag making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories.
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, can affect vehicle performance and When you go to your GM dealer
and lithium batteries contained in safety, including such things as and ask for GM Accessories, you
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, airbags, braking, stability, ride and will know that GM-trained and
may contain perchlorate materials. handling, emissions systems, supported service technicians will
Special handling may be necessary. aerodynamics, durability, and perform the work using genuine GM
For additional information, see electronic systems like antilock Accessories.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ brakes, traction control, and stability Also, see Adding Equipment to the
perchlorate. control. These accessories or Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
modifications could even cause page 3‑42.
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of non‐GM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Hood

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood:
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
Service Work than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑12.
You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the 1. Pull the handle with this symbol
without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on it. It is located in front of the
page 3‑41. driver side door frame near the
. Be sure you have sufficient floor.
knowledge, experience, Keep a record with all parts receipts
the proper replacement and list the mileage and the date of
parts, and tools before any service work performed. See
attempting any vehicle Maintenance Records on
maintenance task. page 11‑10.
. Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-5
If the vehicle has an underhood

lamp, it will automatically come on
and stay on until the hood is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
of the filler caps are on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove
the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its
retainer. Let the hood down and
close it firmly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and 3. Lift the hood, release the hood
lift up the secondary hood prop from its retainer and put the
release, which is located hood prop into the slot in
underneath the middle of the hood.
the hood.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
4.3 L V6 Engine Shown (4.8 L V8 Engine, 5.3 L V8 Engine and 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar)
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Battery on page 10‑31. G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Engine Oil

B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See page 10‑18.
For diesel engine vehicles, see
Cooling System on page 10‑19. H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. “Engine Oil” in the Duramax Diesel
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See See Power Steering Fluid on Supplement.
Cooling System on page 10‑19. page 10‑26.
To ensure proper engine
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid I. Brake Master Cylinder performance and long life, careful
Dipstick. See “Checking the Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on attention must be paid to engine oil.
Fluid Level” under Automatic page 10‑29. Following these simple, but
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed J. Windshield Washer Fluid important steps will help protect
Transmission) on page 10‑12 or Reservoir. See “Adding Washer your investment:
Automatic Transmission Fluid Fluid” under Washer Fluid on . Always use engine oil approved
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 10‑27. to the proper specification and of
page 10‑14. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, the proper viscosity grade. See
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When see the Vehicle Checks section in “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
to Add Engine Oil” under the Duramax diesel supplement. in this section.
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. . Check the engine oil level
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See regularly and maintain the
“Checking Engine Oil” under proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑11.
. Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
It is a good idea to check the engine
acceptable operating range
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
shown on the dipstick are harmful
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
to the engine. If you find that you
must be on level ground. The
have an oil level above the
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
operating range, i.e., the engine
loop. See Engine Compartment
has so much oil that the oil level
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
gets above the cross-hatched
location of the engine oil dipstick. If the oil is below the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
Obtaining an accurate oil level area at the tip of the dipstick, add operating range, the engine could
reading is essential: 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil be damaged. You should drain
and then recheck the level. See out the excess oil or limit driving
1. If the engine has been running “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
recently, turn off the engine and of the vehicle and seek a service
this section for an explanation of professional to remove the
allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
to drain back into the oil pan. excess amount of oil.
oil crankcase capacity, see
Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on See Engine Compartment Overview
after engine shutoff will not page 12‑2. on page 10‑6 for the location of the
provide an accurate oil level engine oil fill cap.
reading.
Add enough oil to put the level
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it somewhere in the proper operating
with a paper towel or cloth, then range. Push the dipstick all the way
push it back in all the way. back in when through.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Use of Substitute Engine Oils if

dexos is unavailable: In the event
Selecting the right engine oil
that dexos‐approved engine oil is
depends on both the proper oil
not available at an oil change or for
specification and viscosity grade:
maintaining proper oil level, you
Specification may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
Use and ask for engine oils with the This vehicle was filled at the factory and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
dexos™ certification mark. Oils with dexos‐approved engine oil. Use of oils that do not meet the
meeting the requirements of the
Notice: Use only engine oil dexos specification, however, may
vehicle should have the dexos
that is approved to the dexos result in reduced performance under
certification mark on the container.
specification or an equivalent certain circumstances.
This certification mark indicates that
engine oil of the appropriate
the oil has been approved to the Viscosity Grade
viscosity grade. Engine oils
dexos specification.
approved to the dexos SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
specification will show the dexos grade for the vehicle. Do not use
symbol on the container. Failure other viscosity oils such as
to use the recommended engine SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
oil or equivalent can result in
engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. If you are
unsure whether the oil is
approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
provider.
10-10 Vehicle Care
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil What to Do with Used Oil

should be used. An oil of this
Used engine oil contains certain
viscosity grade will provide easier
elements that can be unhealthy for
cold starting for the engine at
your skin and could even cause
extremely low temperatures. When
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
selecting an oil of the appropriate
your skin for very long. Clean your
viscosity grade, be sure to always
skin and nails with soap and water,
select an oil that meets the
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
required specification, dexos. See
properly dispose of clothing or rags
“Specification” earlier in this section
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine use and disposal of oil products.
Oil Flushes Used oil can be a threat to the
Do not add anything to the oil. The environment. If you change your
recommended oils with the dexos own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
specification and displaying the from the filter before disposal. Never
dexos certification mark are all that dispose of oil by putting it in the
is needed for good performance and trash or pouring it on the ground,
engine protection. into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
Engine oil system flushes are not it to a place that collects used oil.
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
Vehicle Care 10-11
Engine Oil Life System It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil
the best conditions, the oil life Life System
When to Change Engine Oil system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. To reset the
on a combination of factors which and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained system:
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven. service people who will perform this 1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN
Based on driving conditions, the work and reset the system. It is also with the engine off.
mileage at which an oil change is important to check the oil regularly
2. Fully press and release the
indicated can vary considerably. For over the course of an oil drain
accelerator pedal slowly three
the oil life system to work properly, interval and keep it at the proper
times within five seconds.
the system must be reset every time level.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
When the system has calculated
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) message comes back on when the
that oil life has been diminished, it
since the last oil change. vehicle is started, the engine oil life
indicates that an oil change is
Remember to reset the oil life system has not reset. Repeat the
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
system whenever the oil is changed. procedure.
OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑34.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
10-12 Vehicle Care
Automatic Transmission How to Check Automatic Wait at least 30 minutes before

Transmission Fluid checking the transmission fluid level
Fluid (4-Speed if you have been driving:
Transmission) Because this operation can be a
little difficult, it may be decided to . When outside temperatures are
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, have this done at the dealer service above 32°C (90°F).
see the Duramax diesel supplement department. . At high speed for quite a while.
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to . In heavy traffic — especially in
When to Check and Change follow all the instructions here or a hot weather.
Automatic Transmission Fluid false reading on the dipstick could
result.
. While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check the automatic
transmission fluid level is when the Notice: Too much or too To get the right reading, the fluid
engine oil is changed. little fluid can damage the should be at normal operating
transmission. Too much can temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
Change the fluid and filter at the (180°F to 200°F).
mean that some of the fluid could
intervals listed in Scheduled
come out and fall on hot engine Get the vehicle warmed up by
Maintenance on page 11‑3 and be
parts or exhaust system parts, driving about 24 km (15 mi) when
sure to use the transmission fluid
starting a fire. Too little fluid outside temperatures are above
listed in Recommended Fluids and
could cause the transmission to 10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
overheat. Be sure to get an (50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)
accurate reading if checking the until the engine temperature gauge
transmission fluid. moves and then remains steady for
10 minutes.
Vehicle Care 10-13
A cold fluid check can be made 3. With your foot on the brake 2. Push it back in all the way, wait
after the vehicle has been pedal, move the shift lever three seconds and then pull it
sitting for eight hours or more with through each gear range, back out again.
the engine off, but this is used only pausing for about three seconds
as a reference. Let the engine run at in each range. Then, position the
idle for five minutes if outside shift lever in P (Park).
temperatures are 10°C (50°F) or 4. Let the engine run at idle for
more. If it is colder than 10°C three minutes or more.
(50°F), the engine may have to idle
longer. Should the fluid level be low Then, without shutting off the
during this cold check, the fluid must engine, follow these steps:
be checked hot before adding fluid. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick,
Checking the fluid hot will give a and read the lower level. The
more accurate reading of the fluid fluid level must be in the COLD
level. area for a cold check or in the
HOT or cross-hatched area for a
Checking the Fluid Level hot check. Be sure to keep the
Prepare the vehicle as follows: dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
1. Park the vehicle on a level The transmission dipstick is located
place. Keep the engine running. near the center of the engine 4. If the fluid level is in the
compartment and will be labeled acceptable range, push the
2. With the parking brake applied, with the graphic shown. dipstick back in all the way; then
place the shift lever in P (Park). flip the handle down to lock the
See Engine Compartment Overview dipstick in place.
on page 10‑6 for more information.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull
out the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean rag or paper towel.
10-14 Vehicle Care
How to Add Automatic Notice: Use of the incorrect Automatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid automatic transmission fluid may
damage the vehicle, and the
Fluid (6-Speed
Refer to Recommended Fluids and damages may not be covered by Transmission)
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to the vehicle warranty. Always use
determine what kind of transmission the automatic transmission fluid When to Check and Change
fluid to use. listed in Recommended Fluids Automatic Transmission Fluid
Using a funnel, add fluid down the and Lubricants on page 11‑7. It is usually not necessary to
transmission dipstick tube only after . After adding fluid, recheck the check the transmission fluid level.
checking the transmission fluid fluid level as described under The only reason for fluid loss is a
while it is hot. A cold check is used “How to Check Automatic transmission leak or overheating the
only as a reference. If the fluid level Transmission Fluid,” earlier in transmission. If a small leak is
is low, add only enough of the this section. suspected, use the following
proper fluid to bring the level up to procedures to check the fluid level.
the HOT area for a hot check. . When the correct fluid level is However, if there is a large leak,
It does not take much fluid, obtained, push the dipstick back then it may be necessary to have
generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do in all the way; then flip the the vehicle towed to a dealer
not overfill. handle down to lock the dipstick service department and have it
in place. repaired before driving the vehicle
further.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑3, and be
sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Check Automatic overheat. Be sure to get an temperatures is between 15°C to

Transmission Fluid accurate reading if checking the 32°C (60°F to 90°F). Should the
transmission fluid. fluid level be low during this cold
Because this operation can be check, the fluid must be checked
difficult, it is recommended to have Wait at least 30 minutes with the
engine Off, before checking the Warm or Hot before adding fluid.
this check done at the dealer If the outside temperature is colder
service department, which can transmission fluid level if the vehicle
has been driven: than 15°C (60°F) or hotter than
monitor the transmission 32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot be
temperature. The transmission . In hot weather, when outside performed.
fluid level increases with temperatures are above
temperature. To obtain a highly 32°C (90°F). A warm fluid level check can be
accurate fluid level check, the performed by driving the vehicle
transmission temperature must be
. The vehicle is heavily loaded. under lightly loaded conditions and
measured. . At high speed for quite a while in outside temperatures between 10°C
hot weather. to 27°C (50°F to 80°F). The vehicle
If it is decided to check the fluid should be driven for at least 24 km
level, be sure to follow all the . In heavy traffic and hot weather. (15 mi) before performing a warm
instructions here, or a false reading check. Checking the fluid Warm or
. While pulling a trailer.
on the dipstick may occur. Hot will give a more accurate
After driving under these conditions, reading of the fluid level than a cold
Notice: Too much or too
a hot check can be performed. The check.
little fluid can damage the
fluid should be Hot, which is 71°C to
transmission. Too much can Because the vehicle is equipped
93°C (160°F to 200°F).
mean that some of the fluid could with a high-efficiency air-to-oil
come out and fall on hot engine A cold fluid level check can be cooler, the transmission fluid
parts or exhaust system parts, performed after the vehicle has temperature may not reach the
starting a fire. Too little fluid been sitting for eight hours or more required Hot fluid level checking
could cause the transmission to with the engine off, but this is used temperature under normal lightly
only as a reference. Let the engine loaded driving vehicle conditions.
run at idle for five minutes if outside
10-16 Vehicle Care
Checking the Fluid Level Then, without shutting off the

Prepare the vehicle as follows: engine:
1. Park the vehicle on a level

place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied,
place the shift lever in P (Park). A. COLD Range
3. With foot on the brake pedal, B. WARM Range
move the shift lever through
The transmission dipstick is located C. HOT Range
each gear range, pausing for
about three seconds in each near the center of the engine 3. Check both sides of the dipstick,
range. When M is reached, compartment and will be labeled and read the lower level. The
move the selector from M1 with the graphic shown. fluid level must be in the
through M3. Then, position the See Engine Compartment Overview COLD (A) range for a cold
shift lever in P (Park). on page 10‑6 for more information check, transmission temperature
on location. 27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F),
4. Let the engine run at idle for
between the COLD (A) and
two minutes or more. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull HOT (C) range for a WARM (B)
out the dipstick and wipe it with check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to
a clean rag or paper towel. 140°F) or in the HOT (C)
2. Push it back in all the way, wait cross-hatched range for a hot
three seconds and then pull it check, 71°C to 93°C (160°F to
back out again. 200°F). Be sure to keep the
dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
Vehicle Care 10-17
4. If the fluid level is in the Using a funnel, add fluid down the Notice: Use of the incorrect
acceptable range, push the transmission dipstick tube only after automatic transmission fluid may
dipstick back in all the way; then checking the transmission fluid damage the vehicle, and the
flip the handle down to lock the while it is warm or hot. A cold check damages may not be covered by
dipstick in place. is used only as a reference. If the the vehicle warranty. Always use
fluid level is low, add only enough of the automatic transmission fluid
How to Add Automatic the proper fluid to bring the level up listed in Recommended Fluids
Transmission Fluid to the middle of the WARM (A) or and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and HOT (B) range depending on the . After adding fluid, recheck the
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to ambient temperature and prior fluid level as described under
determine what kind of transmission driving conditions. Refer to “How to “How to Check Automatic
fluid to use. Check Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid,” earlier in
Fluid”, earlier in this section for this section.
instructions on driving to achieve
warm or hot transmission fluid. . When the correct fluid level is
It does not take much fluid, obtained, push the dipstick back
generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do in all the way; then flip the
not overfill. handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
A. WARM Range
B. HOT Range
10-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the engine air
Cleaner/Filter cleaner/filter, do the following:
see the Duramax diesel supplement Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the 1. Unhook the retainer clips and
for more information. scheduled maintenance intervals remove the cover.
and replace it at the first oil change 2. Lift the filter out of the engine air
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) cleaner/filter housing. Care
interval. See Scheduled should be taken to dislodge as
Maintenance on page 11‑3 for more little dirt as possible.
information. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each 3. Clean the engine air cleaner/
engine oil change. filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
How to Inspect the Engine Air cleaner/filter. Make sure that the
Cleaner/Filter filter fits properly into the
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, housing.
remove the filter from the vehicle 5. Reinstall the cover and fasten
and lightly shake the filter to release the retaining clips.
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is
remains covered with dirt, a new
located near the center of the
filter is required. Never use
engine compartment. See Engine
compressed air to clean the filter.
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information on
location.
Vehicle Care 10-19
{ WARNING { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air Heater and radiator hoses, and
cleaner/filter off can cause you or other engine parts, can be very
others to be burned. The air hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
cleaner not only cleans the air; it you can be burned.
helps to stop flames if the engine Do not run the engine if there is a
backfires. Use caution when leak. If you run the engine, it
working on the engine and do not could lose all coolant. That could
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is A. Radiator Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle.
off, dirt can easily get into the B. Coolant Recovery Tank
engine, which could damage it.
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out Notice: Using coolant other than
Always have the air cleaner/filter
of View) DEX-COOL® can cause premature
in place when you are driving.
engine, heater core, or radiator
Cooling System { WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, An electric engine cooling fan can sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
see “Van Models” under “Cooling start even when the engine is not or 24 months, whichever occurs
System” in the Duramax diesel running. To avoid injury, always first. Any repairs would not be
supplement. keep hands, clothing, and tools covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL
The cooling system allows the away from any engine
(silicate-free) coolant in the
engine to maintain the correct cooling fan.
vehicle.
working temperature.
10-20 Vehicle Care

. Will not damage aluminum parts.
Engine Coolant WARNING (Continued) . Helps keep the proper engine
The cooling system in the vehicle is
temperature.
filled with DEX-COOL® engine mixture, the engine could get too
coolant. This coolant is designed to hot but you would not get the Notice: If an improper coolant
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or overheat warning. The engine mixture is used, the engine could
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever could catch fire and you or overheat and be badly damaged.
occurs first. others could be burned. Use a The repair cost would not be
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable covered by the vehicle warranty.
The following explains the cooling
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Too much water in the mixture
system and how to check and add
can freeze and crack the engine,
coolant when it is low. If there is a
radiator, heater core, and other
problem with engine overheating, Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, parts.
see Engine Overheating on drinkable water and DEX-COOL
page 10‑24. coolant. If using this mixture, Notice: If extra inhibitors
nothing else needs to be added. and/or additives are used in the
What to Use vehicle cooling system, the
This mixture:
vehicle could be damaged. Use
{ WARNING . Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this
Adding only plain water or some temperature. manual for the cooling system.
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives boiling protection up to See Recommended Fluids and
can be dangerous. Plain water 129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. information.
the proper coolant mixture will. . Protects against rust and
The coolant warning system is set
corrosion.
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-21
Never dispose of engine coolant by

putting it in the trash, pouring it on { WARNING
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant You can be burned if you spill
changed by an authorized service coolant on hot engine parts.
center, familiar with legal Coolant contains ethylene glycol
requirements regarding used and it will burn if the engine parts
The coolant recovery tank cap has
coolant disposal. This will help are hot enough. Do not spill
this symbol on it.
protect the environment and your coolant on a hot engine.
health. When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at or above the
Checking Coolant COLD FILL mark. If it is not, there Notice: This vehicle has a
could be a leak in the cooling specific coolant fill procedure.
The vehicle must be on a level Failure to follow this procedure
surface when checking the coolant system.
could cause the engine to
level. If the coolant is low, add the coolant overheat and be severely
Check to see if coolant is visible in or take the vehicle to a dealer for damaged.
the coolant recovery tank. If the service.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
coolant inside the coolant recovery How to Add Coolant to the DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
tank is boiling, do not do anything Recovery Tank for Gasoline coolant recovery tank.
else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at
Engines
or above the COLD FILL mark, add If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable see “How to Add Coolant to the
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the Coolant Recovery Tank” under “Van
coolant recovery tank, but be sure Models” in the Cooling System
the cooling system is cool before section of the Duramax diesel
this is done. supplement for the proper coolant
fill procedure.
10-22 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the

Radiator { WARNING
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, Steam and scalding liquids from a
see “How to Add Coolant to the hot cooling system can blow out
Radiator” under “Van Models” in the and burn you badly. They are
Cooling System section of the under pressure, and if you turn
Duramax diesel supplement for the 1. Remove the radiator pressure
the surge tank pressure
proper radiator fill procedure. cap when the cooling system,
cap — even a little — they can
including the radiator pressure
come out at high speed. Never cap and upper radiator hose, is
{ WARNING turn the cap when the cooling no longer hot. Turn the pressure
system, including the surge tank cap slowly counterclockwise
An electric engine cooling fan pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
under the hood can start up even until it first stops. Do not press
cooling system and surge tank down while turning the
when the engine is not running pressure cap to cool if you ever pressure cap.
and can cause injury. Keep have to turn the pressure cap.
hands, clothing, and tools away If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
from any underhood electric fan. stop. A hiss means there is still
If coolant is needed, add the proper some pressure left.
mixture directly to the radiator, but
2. Keep turning the pressure cap,
be sure the cooling system is cool
but now push down as you turn
before this is done.
it. Remove the pressure cap.
Vehicle Care 10-23
3. Fill the radiator with the proper 4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 6. Start the engine and let it run
DEX-COOL coolant mixture, up the COLD FILL mark. until the upper radiator hose can
to the base of the filler neck. 5. Reinstall the cap back on the be felt getting hot. Watch out for
See Recommended Fluids and coolant recovery tank, but leave the engine cooling fan.
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for the radiator pressure cap off. 7. By this time, the coolant level
more information about the inside the radiator filler neck
proper coolant mixture. may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the
filler neck.
10-24 Vehicle Care
8. Replace the pressure cap. At There is an engine coolant See if the engine cooling fan speed
any time during this procedure if temperature gauge on the vehicle's increases when idle speed is
coolant begins to flow out of the instrument panel. See Engine doubled by pushing the accelerator
filler neck, reinstall the Coolant Temperature Gauge on pedal down. If it does not, the
pressure cap. page 5‑14 for more information. vehicle needs service. Turn off the
Notice: If the pressure cap is not If the decision is made not to lift the engine.
tightly installed, coolant loss and hood when this warning appears, Notice: Engine damage from
possible engine damage may but instead get service help right running the engine without
occur. Be sure the cap is properly away. See Roadside Assistance coolant is not covered by the
and tightly secured. Program on page 13‑6. warranty.
If the decision is made to lift the Notice: If the engine catches fire
Engine Overheating hood, make sure the vehicle is because of being driven with no
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, parked on a level surface. coolant, the vehicle can be badly
see the Duramax diesel supplement Then check to see if the engine damaged. The costly repairs
for more information. cooling fans are running. If the would not be covered by the
engine is overheating, both fans vehicle warranty.
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of engine overheating. should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Vehicle Care 10-25
If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: is no longer in the overheat zone or
from the engine if you see or hear .
an overheat warning no longer
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
the vehicle until it cools down. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
Wait until there is no sign of vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on front. If the warning does not come
the hood. Grades” under Trailer Towing on back on, continue to drive normally.
page 9‑52.
If you keep driving when the If the warning continues, pull over,
If the overheat warning is displayed stop, and park the vehicle
engine is overheated, the liquids
with no sign of steam: right away.
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the 1. Turn the air off.
engine if it overheats, and get out 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
of the vehicle until the engine temperature and to the highest
is cool. fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
10-26 Vehicle Care
If there is still no sign of steam, extra shifts. It is merely the cooling When to Check Power Steering
push down the accelerator until the system functioning properly. The fan Fluid
engine speed is about twice as fast will slow down when additional
as normal idle speed for at least cooling is not required and the It is not necessary to regularly
three minutes while you are parked. clutch partially disengages. check power steering fluid unless
If the warning is still on, turn off the there is a leak suspected in the
This fan noise may be heard when system or an unusual noise is
engine until it cools down. starting the engine. It will go away heard. A fluid loss in this system
If the decision is made not to lift the as the fan clutch partially could indicate a problem. Have the
hood, get service help right away. disengages. system inspected and repaired.
Engine Fan Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering

Fluid
The vehicle has a clutched engine
cooling fan. When the clutch is To check the power steering fluid,
engaged, the fan spins faster to do the following:
provide more air to cool the engine. 1. Turn the key off and let the
In most everyday driving conditions, engine compartment cool down.
the fan is spinning slower and the
clutch is not fully engaged. This 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
improves fuel economy and reduces The power steering fluid reservoir is reservoir clean.
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle located in the engine compartment 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
loading, trailer towing, and/or high on the driver side of the vehicle. dipstick with a clean rag.
outside temperatures, the fan speed See Engine Compartment Overview
increases as the clutch more fully on page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
engages, so an increase in fan
noise may be heard. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making
Vehicle Care 10-27
4. Replace the cap and completely Washer Fluid Notice

tighten it. . When using concentrated
5. Then remove the cap again and
What to Use washer fluid, follow the
look at the fluid level on the When the vehicle needs windshield manufacturer's instructions
dipstick. washer fluid, be sure to read the for adding water.
The level should be at the COLD manufacturer's instructions before . Do not mix water with
use. If operating the vehicle in an
FILL mark. If necessary, add only ready-to-use washer fluid.
area where the temperature may fall
enough fluid to bring the level up to Water can cause the solution
the mark. below freezing, use a fluid that has to freeze and damage the
sufficient protection against washer fluid tank and other
To prevent contamination of brake freezing.
fluid, never check or fill the power parts of the washer system.
steering reservoir with the brake Adding Washer Fluid Also, water does not clean as
master cylinder cover off. well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only
What to Use three-quarters full when it is
To determine what kind of fluid to very cold. This allows for
use, see Recommended Fluids and fluid expansion if freezing
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always occurs, which could damage
use the proper fluid. Failure to use the tank if it is
the proper fluid can cause leaks and Open the cap with the washer completely full.
damage hoses and seals. symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant
the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
page 10‑6 for reservoir location. windshield washer system
and paint.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
Vehicle Care 10-29

. A fluid leak in the brake
Brake Fluid hydraulic system can also cause WARNING (Continued)
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a You or others could be burned,
leak means that sooner or later and the vehicle could be
the brakes will not work well. damaged. Add brake fluid only
Do not top off the brake fluid. when work is done on the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. hydraulic system. See “Checking
If fluid is added when the linings are Brake Fluid” in this section.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
worn, there will be too much fluid
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See
when new brake linings are Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
Engine Compartment Overview on
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, to determine when to check the
page 10‑6 for the location of the
as necessary, only when work is brake fluid. See Scheduled
reservoir.
done on the brake hydraulic system. Maintenance on page 11‑3.
There are only two reasons why the
Checking Brake Fluid
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
{ WARNING
Check brake fluid by looking at the
. The brake fluid level goes down If too much brake fluid is added, it brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
because of normal brake lining can spill on the engine and/or fuel Compartment Overview on
wear. When new linings are operated heater parts, page 10‑6.
installed, the fluid level goes if equipped. If the vehicle has a
back up. diesel engine and a fuel operated
heater, see “Fuel Operated
Heater (FOH)” in the diesel
engine supplement. The fluid will
burn if the engine is hot enough.
(Continued)
10-30 Vehicle Care
What to Add Notice

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid . Using the wrong fluid can
from a sealed container. See badly damage brake
Recommended Fluids and hydraulic system parts. For
Lubricants on page 11‑7. example, just a few drops of
Always clean the brake fluid mineral-based oil, such as
reservoir cap and the area around engine oil, in the brake
the cap before removing it. This hydraulic system can
helps keep dirt from entering the damage brake hydraulic
reservoir. system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
The fluid level should be above { WARNING the wrong kind of fluid.
MIN. If it is not, have the brake With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
hydraulic system checked to see if brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
there is a leak. the paint finish can be
brakes might not work well. This
After work is done on the brake could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
hydraulic system, make sure the the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
level is above the MIN but not over vehicle. If you do, wash it off
the MAX mark. immediately.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Battery Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive

Refer to the replacement number Transfer Case
shown on the original battery label { WARNING
when a new battery is needed. See When to Check Lubricant
Batteries have acid that can burn
Engine Compartment Overview on Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
you and gas that can explode.
page 10‑6 for battery location. to determine how often to check the
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on lubricant. See Scheduled
{ DANGER page 10‑84 for tips on working Maintenance on page 11‑3.
Battery posts, terminals, and around a battery without How to Check Lubricant
related accessories contain lead getting hurt.
To get an accurate reading, the
and lead compounds, chemicals vehicle should be on a level
known to the State of California to Infrequent Usage: Remove the surface.
cause cancer and reproductive black, negative (−) cable from the
harm. Wash hands after handling. battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Front Axle
When to Check and Change
Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑3.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the
If the level is below the bottom of vehicle should be on a level If the level is below the bottom of
the filler plug hole, some lubricant surface. the fill plug hole, some lubricant
will need to be added. Add enough may need to be added.
lubricant to raise the level to the When the differential is cold, add
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use enough lubricant to raise the level to
care not to overtighten the plug. 10 mm (3/8 in) below the fill
What to Use plug hole.
Refer to Recommended Fluids and When the differential is at operating
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to temperature (warm), add enough
determine what kind of lubricant lubricant to raise the level to the
to use. bottom of the fill plug hole.
Vehicle Care 10-33
What to Use How to Check Lubricant What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids and Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 to Lubricants on page 11‑7 to
determine what kind of lubricant determine what kind of lubricant
to use. to use.
Rear Axle Noise Control System

When to Check Lubricant The following information relates to
compliance with federal noise
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule emission standards for vehicles with
to determine how often to check the a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
lubricant. See Scheduled (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg
Maintenance on page 11‑3. (10,000 lbs). The Maintenance
Schedule provides information on
To get an accurate reading, the maintaining the noise control system
vehicle should be on a level to minimize degradation of the noise
surface. emission control system during the
If you have the 1500 Series, the life of the vehicle. The noise control
proper level is from 15 mm (5/8 in) to system warranty is given in the
40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom of vehicle warranty booklet.
the fill plug hole. The proper level These standards apply only to
for the 2500 and 3500 Series is vehicles sold in the United States.
from 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below the
bottom of the fill plug hole. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper
level.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Federal law prohibits the following Among those acts presumed to Air Intake:
acts or the causing thereof: constitute tampering are the acts . Removal of the air cleaner
1. The removal or rendering listed below. silencer.
inoperative by any person, Insulation: . Modification of the air cleaner.
other than for purposes of
maintenance, repair or
. Removal of the noise shields or Exhaust:
replacement, of any device or any underhood insulation.
. Removal of the muffler and/or
element of design incorporated Engine: resonator.
into any new vehicle for the . Removal or rendering engine . Removal of the exhaust pipes
purpose of noise control, prior to
speed governor, if the vehicle and exhaust pipe clamps.
its sale or delivery to the ultimate
has one, inoperative so as to
purchaser or while it is in use; or Fuel Operated Heater
allow engine speed to exceed
2. The use of the vehicle after such manufacturer specifications. (FOH) — Diesel Engine:
device or element of design has . Removal of the muffler.
been removed or rendered Fan and Drive:
inoperative by any person. . Removal of fan clutch, if the
vehicle has one, or rendering
clutch inoperative.
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the
vehicle has one.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 9‑36.
{ WARNING If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular
When you are doing this position, contact your dealer for brake immediately if the vehicle
service. begins to move.
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle 3. With the engine off, turn the
moves, you or others could be Automatic Transmission
ignition on, but do not start the
injured. Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
Function Check regular brake, try to move the
1. Before starting this check, be shift lever out of P (Park) with
sure there is enough room { WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
around the vehicle.
When you are doing this your dealer for service.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
inspection, the vehicle could
brake and the regular brake.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑36. moves, you or others could be
injured.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it 1. Before starting this check, be
starts. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Ignition Transmission Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
Lock Check Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set
While parked, and with the parking the parking brake.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to { WARNING . To check the parking brake's
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever holding ability: With the engine
position. When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move. running and the transmission in
. The ignition should turn to You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
LOCK/OFF only when the shift pressure from the regular brake
and property could be damaged.
lever is in P (Park). pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Make sure there is room in front
held by the parking brake only.
. The ignition key should come of the vehicle in case it begins to
out only in LOCK/OFF. roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park)
brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability:
Contact your dealer if service is
begin to move. With the engine running, shift to
required.
P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Wiper Blade Replacement 4. To install the new wiper insert,

slide the notched end last, into
Windshield wiper blades should be the end with two blade claws.
inspected for wear and cracking. Then slide the insert all the way
See Scheduled Maintenance on through the blade claws at the
page 11‑3 for more information on opposite end.
wiper blade inspection.
5. Make sure that the notches are
Replacement blades come in locked by the bottom claws.
different types and are removed in Make sure that all other claws
different ways. To remove the type are properly locked on both
with a release clip, do the following: sides of the insert slot.
1. Lift the wiper arm until it locks 6. Put the blade assembly pivot in
into a vertical position. 2. Press down on the blade the wiper arm hook. Pull it up
assembly pivot locking tab. Pull until the pivot locking tab locks
down on the blade assembly to in the hook slot.
release it from the wiper
arm hook. 7. Carefully lower the wiper arm
and blade assembly into the
3. The insert has two notches at windshield.
one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notched end,
pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps To remove the headlamp assembly

from the vehicle and access the
For the proper type of replacement Composite Headlamp bulbs:
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑43.
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
A. High‐Beam Headlamp
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you B. Low‐Beam Headlamp
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package. 2. Remove the two bolts from the
headlamp assembly.
3. Lift the headlamp assembly to
release the lower tabs from the
radiator support.
4. Turn the headlamp forward and
upward to remove it from the
grille.
Vehicle Care 10-39
To prevent headlamp vibration 2. Pull the bulb (C) forward to gain

and shortened bulb life, be sure access to the electrical
to insert the headlamp assembly connector.
tabs in the slots at the lower
portion of the housing.
Sealed‐Beam Headlamp
5. Disconnect the electrical

connector.
6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise
one quarter turn to remove it
from the headlamp assembly. 3. Disconnect the electrical
connector (B) and remove the
7. Install the new bulb into the headlamp bulb (A).
headlamp assembly and connect
the electrical connector. A. Headlamp retainer screws 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
B. Headlamp retainer reinstall the headlamp.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the
headlamp assembly. C. Sealed‐beam headlamp bulb
1. Remove the four screws (A)
from the headlamp retainer (B).
Pull the retainer (B) out and set
it aside.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Front Turn Signal, To replace the front turn signal, 7. Reinstall the lamp assembly into
sidemarker, and/or parking lamp the grille until the outboard clip
Sidemarker, and Parking bulb(s): snaps into place.
Lamps
Taillamps
To replace a taillamp/turn signal
lamp or back‐up lamp bulb:
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the

outboard clip on the lamp by
pushing inboard and prying the
A. Front Parking and Turn lamp assembly forward.
Signal Lamp 2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
B. Front Sidemarker Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise one quarter
turn and remove it from the lamp
assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the 1. Remove the two inboard nuts
socket by pulling it straight out. from the inside of the taillamp
5. Replace the bulb. assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to reinstall it in the lamp
assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-41
3. Carefully disconnect the push 7. Remove the bulb by pulling it

pins (A) from the applique straight out.
bracket 8. Push the new bulb into the
4. Remove the third nut (C) from socket.
the upper outboard side of 9. Reinstall the bulb socket by
the lamp. turning it clockwise into the lamp
5. Remove the taillamp assembly assembly.
from the vehicle. 10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to
reinstall the taillamp assembly
and applique.
2. The third nut (C) is under the

applique piece (B) above the
lamp. Remove the two inboard
applique nuts. Pull the
applique (B) straight rearward
slightly to clear the studs. Then
rotate the applique (B) just far
enough to gain access to the
outer push pins (A).
6. Remove the taillamp/turn signal

lamp (A) or back‐up lamp (B)
bulb socket by turning it
turn and pulling it out of the lamp
assembly.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Center High-Mounted 3. Turn the bulb socket License Plate Lamp

Stoplamp (CHMSL) turn to remove it from the lamp To replace one of these bulbs:
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp assembly.
(CHMSL) is located above the rear 4. Pull the old bulb straight out of
doors at the center of the vehicle. the socket and push the new
To replace a bulb: bulb into the socket.
5. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
one quarter turn to install it in the
lamp assembly.
6. Reinstall the CHMSL assembly
and two screws.
Do not block or damage the CHMSL
when items are loaded on the roof
of the vehicle. A. Bulb Socket
B. License Plate Bulb Assembly
C. Screws
1. Remove the screws (C) that
1. Remove the two screws from the secure the license plate bulb
CHMSL assembly. assembly (B).
2. Remove the CHMSL assembly. 2. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
Vehicle Care 10-43
3. Install the new bulb. Bulb Electrical System

Exterior Lamp
4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 to Number
reinstall the license plate bulb
Headlamps Electrical System
assembly.
Composite Overload
Replacement Bulbs High-Beam 9005LL The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Headlamp breakers to protect against an
Bulb
Exterior Lamp Composite electrical system overload.
Number
Low-Beam 9006LL When the current electrical load is
Back-up, Rear Headlamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
Parking, Stoplamp, and closes, protecting the circuit
3157KX Sealed Beam
and Turn H6054 until the current load returns to
Signal Lamp Headlamp
normal or the problem is fixed. This
Center greatly reduces the chance of circuit
For replacement bulbs not listed
High‐Mounted Stop 912LL overload and fire caused by
here, contact your dealer.
Lamp (CHMSL) electrical problems.
Front Parking and
3157KX
Turn Signal Lamp
Front
194LL
Sidemarker Lamp
License
194LL
Plate Lamp
10-44 Vehicle Care
Fuses and circuit breakers protect Windshield Wipers Fuses and Circuit
the following in the vehicle:
If the wiper motor overheats due to Breakers
. Headlamp Wiring heavy snow or ice, the windshield
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
. Windshield Wiper Motor wipers will stop until the motor cools
protected from short circuits by a
and will then restart.
. Power Windows and Other combination of fuses and circuit
Power Accessories Although the circuit is protected breakers. This greatly reduces the
from electrical overload, overload chance of fires caused by electrical
Replace a bad fuse with a new one due to heavy snow or ice may problems.
of the identical size and rating. cause wiper linkage damage.
Look at the silver-colored band
If there is a problem on the road and Always clear ice and heavy snow
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
a fuse needs to be replaced, the from the windshield before using the
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
same amperage fuse can be windshield wipers.
you replace a bad fuse with a new
borrowed. Choose some feature of If the overload is caused by an one of the identical size and rating.
the vehicle that is not needed to use electrical problem and not snow or
and replace it as soon as possible. ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Vehicle Care 10-45
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The fuse block is located in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage

Right Stop/Turn 17 Transmission Engine Control
3
Trailer 30 Module Ignition/
Air Conditioning
18 Glow Plug Module
4 Spare Compressor
Transmission
5 Spare Engine Control
19 31 Control Module
Module Battery
Fuel System Ignition
6 Control Module 20 Spare
Transmission
Ignition
Left Stop/Turn 32 Control Module
21
Body Control Trailer Battery
7
Module 5
22 Spare 33 Spare
Body Control
8 23 Spare 34 Spare
Module 7
24 Fuel Pump Fuel Operated
Body Control 35
9 Heater Module
Module 4 Auxiliary Power
25
Outlet Fuel System
Instrument Panel
10 36 Control Module
Cluster Body Control
26 Battery
Module 3
11 Trailer Wiring
Special Equipment Left High‐Beam
27 51
12 Spare Headlamp
Option
13 Brake Switch Right High‐Beam
28 Airbag 52
Headlamp
14 Windshield Washer
Steering Wheel
29
16 Horn Sensor
Vehicle Care 10-47
Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage Mini Fuse Usage

Left Low‐Beam Daytime Engine Control
53 78
Headlamp Running Lamps 2 Module Powertrain
66
(LOLVL‐V22)
Right Low‐Beam Even Ignition/
54 (If Equipped) 79
Headlamp Injectors
Daytime Running
55 Wiper
Lamps 1 J‐Case Fuse Usage
67
Canister Vent (UPLVL+V22)
56 1 ABS Motor
Solenoid (If Equipped)
Body Control Auxiliary Stop 2 ABS Module
58 68
Module 2 Lamps 41 Spare
Body Control 69 Spare 42 Trailer Wiring
59
Module 1
70 Spare 43 Fan High
61 Spare
71 Fuel Heater 44 Starter Solenoid
Oxygen Sensor 2
Body Control Engine Control
62 (Post), EV Fan 72 45
Module 6 Module/Powertrain
(Diesel)
Lighter/Data Link 46 Spare
63 Spare 73
Connection
Mass Air Flow/ 47 Fan Lo
64 75 V6 Fuel Injectors
Canister Vent 74 Front Blower
76 Spare
Odd Ignition/
65
Injectors Oxygen Sensor
77
2 (Pre)
10-48 Vehicle Care
Relay Usage
15 Run/Crank
37 Spare
38 Fuel Pump
39 Crank
Air Conditioning
40
Compressor
48 Fan High
49 Powertrain
50 Spare
57 Fan Low
60 Fan Control
Floor Console Fuse Block

The floor console fuse block is
located under the driver seat.
The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-49
Mini‐Fuse Usage Mini‐Fuse Usage Mini‐Fuse Usage

®
F1 Empty OnStar Remote Function
F11
(If Equipped) F21 Actuator/Tire
Steering Wheel
F2 Pressure Monitor
Sensor F12 Empty
Ignition Switch/
Auxiliary Parking Heating, Ventilation
F3 Discrete Logic
Lamps (Cut‐Away) F13 and Air F22
Ignition
Conditioning 2
F4 Front Park Lamps Sensor (PK3)
Heating, Ventilation
F5 Trailer Park Lamps Instrument Panel
F14 and Air F23
Cluster
Upfitter Park Conditioning 1
F6
Lamps Heating, Ventilation
F15 Empty
Right Rear and Air
F7 F25
Outside Rear View Conditioning
Park Lamp F17
Mirror Heater Control
Left Rear
F8 Rear Window Auxiliary/Trailer
Park Lamp F18 F26
Defogger Backup
Outside Rear View
F9 F19 Compass F27 Taillamps Backup
Mirror Switch
Radio/Chime/XM™ Upfitter Courtesy
Airbag/Automatic F30
F10 F20 Satellite Radio Lamps
Occupant Sensing
(If Equipped)
F31 Front Door Lock
10-50 Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuse Usage Relays Usage Wheels and Tires

F32 Rear Door Lock Run (High Current
K1 Tires
Micro)
F33 Cargo Door Unlock
Empty (High Every new GM vehicle has
Passenger Door K2
F34 Current Micro) high-quality tires made by a
Unlock
Park Lamps (High leading tire manufacturer. See
Rear Passenger K3 the warranty manual for
F35 Current Micro)
Door Unlock information regarding the tire
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 warranty and where to get
F36 Driver Door Unlock K4
(High Current Mini)
F37 Empty
service. For additional
Rear Defogger information refer to the tire
F38 Empty K5 (High Current manufacturer.
Micro)
J‐Case Fuse Usage Retained { WARNING
F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1 Accessory Power
K6 . Poorly maintained and
(RAP) (High
F24 Empty Current Micro) improperly used tires are
dangerous.
Upfitter Auxiliary 2
F28 . Overloading the tires can
Reading Lamps Circuit Usage
Breaker cause overheating as a result
F29 Rear Blower of too much flexing. There
CB1 Power Seats could be a blowout and a
CB2 Power Windows serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-51
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
maintain the recommended the tires.
pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as
. Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode. (A) Tire Size: The tire size
impact — such as when code is a combination of letters
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at and numbers used to define a
the recommended pressure. Tire Sidewall Labeling particular tire's width, height,
. Worn or old tires can cause a Useful information about a tire is aspect ratio, construction type,
crash. If the tread is badly molded into the sidewall. The and service description. See the
worn, replace them. examples show a typical “Tire Size” illustration later in this
. Replace any tires that have passenger vehicle and light section for more detail.
been damaged by impacts truck tire sidewall.
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
10-52 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire manufactured. The TIN is

Performance Criteria molded onto both sides of the
Specification): Original tire, although only one side may
equipment tires designed to have the date of manufacture.
GM's specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in
code molded onto the sidewall. the sidewall and under the tread.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to
(C) DOT (Department of grade tires based on three
Transportation): The Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
performance factors: treadwear,
Department of Transportation traction, and temperature (A) Tire Size: The tire size
(DOT) code indicates that the resistance. For more code is a combination of letters
tire is in compliance with information, see Uniform Tire and numbers used to define a
the U.S. Department of Quality Grading on page 10‑68. particular tire's width, height,
Transportation Motor Vehicle aspect ratio, construction type,
Safety Standards. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation and service description. See the
Load Limit: Maximum load “Tire Size” illustration later in this
(D) Tire Identification Number that can be carried and the
(TIN): The letters and numbers section for more detail.
maximum pressure needed
following the DOT code are to support that load. For
the Tire Identification Number information on recommended
(TIN). The TIN shows the tire pressure see Tire Pressure
manufacturer and plant code, on page 10‑57 and Vehicle Load
tire size, and date the tire was Limits on page 9‑12.
Vehicle Care 10-53
(B) TPC Spec (Tire (D) DOT (Department of (F) Tire Ply Material : The type
Performance Criteria Transportation): The of cord and number of plies in
Specification): Original Department of Transportation the sidewall and under the tread.
equipment tires designed to (DOT) code indicates that (G) Single Tire Maximum
GM's specific tire performance the tire is in compliance with Load: Maximum load that can
criteria have a TPC specification the U.S. Department of be carried and the maximum
code molded onto the sidewall. Transportation Motor Vehicle pressure needed to support that
GM's TPC specifications meet Safety Standards. load when used as a single. For
or exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Identification Number information on recommended
guidelines. This does not apply (TIN): The letters and numbers tire pressure see Tire Pressure
to Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 following the DOT code are on page 10‑57 and Vehicle Load
RSA and Goodyear LT225/ the Tire Identification Number Limits on page 9‑12.
75R16 G933 RSD commercial (TIN). The TIN shows the
truck tires. manufacturer and plant code,
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: tire size, and date the tire was
Maximum load that can be manufactured. The TIN is
carried and the maximum molded onto both sides of the
pressure needed to support that tire, although only one side may
load when used in a dual have the date of manufacture.
configuration. For information on
recommended tire pressure see
Tire Pressure on page 10‑57
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
10-54 Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire
cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
of the tire. Air pressure is Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
the tread.
Accessory Weight: The designator which can also
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) date of production.
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
steering, power brakes, power Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑57. on page 9‑12.
conditioning.
Curb Weight: The weight of a GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Aspect Ratio: The relationship Rating for the front axle. See
of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9‑12.
cords that is located between and coolant, but without
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo.
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Vehicle Care 10-55
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating for the rear axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces
page 9‑12. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a
Intended Outboard Sidewall : molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears
that must always face outward load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears
when mounted on a vehicle. maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric higher or deeper than the same
unit for air pressure. Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A Weight: The sum of curb of the tire.
tire used on light duty trucks and weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
some multipurpose passenger tire used on passenger cars and
vehicles. production options weight.
some light duty trucks and
Load Index: An assigned Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles.
number ranging from 1 to 279 number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
that corresponds to the load Pressure: Vehicle
carrying capacity of a tire. 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑12. manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire
Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10‑57
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: The
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear number of designated seating
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread positions multiplied by
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires Limits on page 9‑12.
and upon which the tire beads on page 10‑65. Vehicle Maximum Load on the
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): due to curb weight, accessory
between the tread and the bead. A tire information system that weight, occupant weight, and
provides consumers with cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction,
alphanumeric code assigned to Vehicle Placard: A label
temperature, and treadwear. permanently attached to a
a tire indicating the maximum Ratings are determined
speed at which a tire can vehicle showing the vehicle
by tire manufacturers using capacity weight and the original
operate. government testing procedures. equipment tire size and
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the recommended inflation pressure.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform See “Tire and Loading
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Information Label” under Vehicle
page 10‑68. Load Limits on page 9‑12.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Vehicle Care 10-57
Tire Pressure
. Rough ride. When to Check
Tires need the correct amount of
. Needless damage from Check the tires once a month
air pressure to operate road hazards. or more.
effectively. The Tire and Loading Do not forget the spare tire,
Notice: Neither tire Information label on the vehicle if the vehicle has one.
underinflation nor indicates the original equipment SeeFull-Size Spare Tire on
overinflation is good. tires and the correct cold tire page 10‑83 for additional
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The information.
that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to How to Check
can result in:
support the vehicle's maximum Use a good quality pocket-type
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. gauge to check tire pressure.
overheating which could Proper tire inflation cannot be
lead to a blowout. For additional information
regarding how much weight the determined by looking at the tire.
. Premature or vehicle can carry, and an Check the tire inflation pressure
irregular wear. example of the Tire and Loading when the tires are cold, meaning
Information label, see Vehicle the vehicle has not been driven
. Poor handling.
Load Limits on page 9‑12. How for at least three hours or no
. Reduced fuel economy. the vehicle is loaded affects more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle handling and ride
have too much air, can comfort. Never load the vehicle
result in: with more weight than it was
. Unusual wear. designed to carry.
. Poor handling.
10-58 Vehicle Care
Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor As an added safety feature, your
tire valve stem. Press the tire vehicle has been equipped with a
System tire pressure monitoring system
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor pressure telltale when one or more
If the cold tire inflation pressure
technology to check tire pressure of your tires is significantly
matches the recommended levels. The TPMS sensors monitor under‐inflated.
pressure on the Tire and the air pressure in your tires and
Loading Information label, no Accordingly, when the low tire
transmit tire pressure readings to a pressure telltale illuminates, you
further adjustment is necessary. receiver located in the vehicle. should stop and check your tires as
If the inflation pressure is low, soon as possible, and inflate them
Each tire, including the spare
add air until the recommended (if provided), should be checked to the proper pressure. Driving on a
pressure is reached. If the monthly when cold and inflated to significantly under‐inflated tire
inflation pressure is high, press the inflation pressure recommended causes the tire to overheat and can
on the metal stem in the center by the vehicle manufacturer on the lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
of the tire valve to release air. vehicle placard or tire inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tread life, and may affect the
Re-check the tire pressure with tires of a different size than the size vehicle's handling and stopping
the tire gauge. indicated on the vehicle placard or ability.
Return the valve caps on the tire inflation pressure label, you Please note that the TPMS is
valve stems to prevent leaks should determine the proper tire not a substitute for proper tire
and keep out dirt and moisture. inflation pressure for those tires.) maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Vehicle Care 10-59
Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction Tire Pressure Monitor
equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
Operation
system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or This vehicle may have a Tire
The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
combined with the low tire pressure TPMS to continue to function The TPMS is designed to warn the
telltale. When the system detects a properly. driver when a low tire pressure
malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor condition exists. TPMS sensors are
approximately one minute and then Operation on page 10‑59 for mounted onto each tire and wheel
remain continuously illuminated. additional information. assembly, excluding the spare tire
This sequence will continue upon and wheel assembly. The TPMS
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications sensors monitor the air pressure in
long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and the tires and transmit the tire
When the malfunction indicator is Industry Canada pressure readings to a receiver
illuminated, the system may not be located in the vehicle.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
able to detect or signal low tire page 13‑16 for information
pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal
malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC)
of reasons, including the installation rules and Industry Canada
of replacement or alternate tires or Standards RSS-210/220/310.
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop
as soon as possible and inflate the
10-60 Vehicle Care
tires to the recommended pressure A Tire and Loading Information label TPMS Malfunction Light and
shown on the Tire and Loading shows the size of the original Message
Information label. See Vehicle Load equipment tires and the correct
Limits on page 9‑12. inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
they are cold. See Vehicle Load if one or more of the TPMS sensors
A message to check the pressure in are missing or inoperable. When the
a specific tire displays in the Driver Limits on page 9‑12, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information system detects a malfunction, the
Information Center (DIC). The low low tire pressure warning light
tire pressure warning light and the label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 10‑57. flashes for about one minute and
DIC warning message come on at then stays on for the remainder of
each ignition cycle until the tires are The TPMS can warn about a the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
inflated to the correct inflation low tire pressure condition but it message also displays. The
pressure. If the vehicle has DIC does not replace normal tire malfunction light and DIC warning
buttons, tire pressure levels can be maintenance. See Tire Inspection message come on at each ignition
viewed. For additional information on page 10‑63, Tire Rotation on cycle until the problem is corrected.
and details about the DIC operation page 10‑63 and Tires on Some of the conditions that can
and displays, see Driver Information page 10‑50. cause these to come on are:
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 and Tire Notice: Tire sealant materials are
Messages on page 5‑38.
. One of the road tires has been
not all the same. A non-approved replaced with the spare tire. The
The low tire pressure warning light tire sealant could damage the spare tire does not have a
may come on in cool weather when TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor TPMS sensor. The malfunction
the vehicle is first started, and then damage caused by using an light and the DIC message
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This incorrect tire sealant is not should go off after the road tire
could be an early indicator that the covered by the vehicle warranty. is replaced and the sensor
air pressure is getting low and Always use only the matching process is performed
needs to be inflated to the proper GM-approved tire sealant successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
pressure. available through your dealer or Matching Process" later in this
included in the vehicle. section.
Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching
process was not done or not not match the original equipment Process
completed successfully after tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
rotating the tires. The other than those recommended Each TPMS sensor has a unique
malfunction light and the DIC could prevent the TPMS from identification code. The identification
message should go off after functioning properly. See Buying code needs to be matched to a new
successfully completing the New Tires on page 10‑66. tire/wheel position after rotating the
sensor matching process. See vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
. Operating electronic devices or more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
"TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio
Process" later in this section. the TPMS sensor matching process
wave frequencies similar to the should be performed after replacing
. One or more TPMS sensors are TPMS could cause the TPMS a spare tire with a road tire
missing or damaged. The sensors to malfunction. containing the TPMS sensor. The
malfunction light and the DIC If the TPMS is not functioning malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the properly, it cannot detect or signal a message should go off at the next
TPMS sensors are installed and low tire condition. See your dealer ignition cycle. The sensors are
the sensor matching process is for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to the tire/wheel positions,
performed successfully. See light and DIC message come on using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
your dealer for service. and stay on. following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service or to
purchase a relearn tool.
10-62 Vehicle Care
There are two minutes to match The horn sounds twice to signal 6. Proceed to the passenger side
the first tire/wheel position, and the receiver is in relearn mode front tire, and repeat the
five minutes overall to match all and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE procedure in Step 5.
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes message displays on the DIC 7. Proceed to the passenger side
longer, the matching process stops screen. rear tire, and repeat the
and must be restarted. If the vehicle does not have RKE procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensor matching or DIC buttons, press the trip 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
process is: odometer reset stem located on tire, and repeat the procedure in
1. Set the parking brake. the instrument panel cluster until Step 5. The horn sounds two
the PRESS V TO RELEARN times to indicate the sensor
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with TIRE POSITIONS message
the engine off. identification code has been
displays. The horn sounds twice matched to the driver side rear
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry to signal the receiver is in tire, and the TPMS sensor
(RKE) transmitter's LOCK and relearn mode and TIRE matching process is no longer
UNLOCK buttons at the same LEARNING ACTIVE message active. The TIRE LEARNING
time for approximately displays on the DIC screen. ACTIVE message on the DIC
five seconds. The horn sounds 4. Start with the driver side display screen goes off.
twice to signal the receiver is in front tire.
relearn mode and TIRE 9. Turn the ignition switch to
LEARNING ACTIVE message 5. Place the relearn tool against LOCK/OFF.
displays on the DIC screen. the tire sidewall, near the valve 10. Set all four tires to the
stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
If the vehicle does not have
activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire
RKE, press the Driver A horn chirp confirms that the
Information Center (DIC) vehicle and Loading Information label.
sensor identification code has
information button until the
been matched to this tire and
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE wheel position.
POSITIONS message displays.
Vehicle Care 10-63
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
more places around the tire Scheduled Maintenance on
can be seen. page 11‑3.
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a Use this rotation pattern when
showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The rotating the tires.
rubber. first rotation is the most If the vehicle has a compact
important. spare tire, do not include it in the
. The tread or sidewall is
cracked, cut, or snagged Any time unusual wear is tire rotation.
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon Adjust the front and rear tires to
fabric. as possible and check the wheel the recommended inflation
alignment. Also check for pressure on the Tire and
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. See
or split. Loading Information label after
When It Is Time for New Tires the tires have been rotated. See
on page 10‑65 and Wheel Tire Pressure on page 10‑57
Replacement on page 10‑70. and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑12.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor Lightly coat the center of the The outer tire on a dual wheel setup
System. See Tire Pressure wheel hub with wheel bearing generally wears faster than the
Monitor Operation on grease after a wheel change or inner tire. Tires last longer and wear
page 10‑59. tire rotation to prevent corrosion more evenly if they are rotated. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑63 and
Check that all wheel nuts are or rust build-up. Do not get
Tire Rotation on page 10‑63. Also
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease on the flat wheel see Scheduled Maintenance on
Nut Torque” under Capacities mounting surface or on the page 11‑3.
and Specifications on wheel nuts or bolts.
page 12‑2.
Dual Tire Rotation
{ WARNING
If the vehicle is operated with a
{ WARNING When the vehicle is new,
or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, tire that is underinflated, the tire
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the or wheel nut is replaced, check the can overheat. An overheated tire
parts to which it is fastened, can wheel nut torque after can lose air suddenly or catch
make wheel nuts become loose 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km fire. You or others could be
after time. The wheel could come (100, 1,000, and 6,000 m) of driving. injured. Properly inflate all tires,
off and cause an accident. When For proper wheel nut tightening including the spare.
changing a wheel, remove any information, see “Removing the Flat
rust or dirt from places where the Tire and Installing the Spare Tire”
See Tires on page 10‑50 and Tire
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In later in this section, under If a Tire
Pressure on page 10‑57 for more
an emergency, a cloth or a paper Goes Flat on page 10‑71. Also see
information on proper tire inflation.
towel can be used; however, use “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
a scraper or wire brush later to
page 12‑2.
remove all rust or dirt.
Vehicle Care 10-65
When It Is Time for New Some commercial truck tires, Vehicle Storage
including Goodyear LT225/75R16
Tires G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Factors such as maintenance, 75R16 G933 RSD, may not have
a vehicle that will be stored for at
temperatures, driving speeds, treadwear indicators. If the tires do
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
vehicle loading, and road conditions not have treadwear indicators,
area away from direct sunlight to
affect the wear rate of the tires. replace the tires when the tread
slow aging. This area should be free
depth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) for
of grease, gasoline or other
the front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) for
substances that can deteriorate
the rear tires. See Tire Inspection
rubber.
on page 10‑63 and Tire Rotation on
page 10‑63 for additional Parking for an extended period can
information. cause flat spots on the tires that
may result in vibrations while
The rubber in tires ages over time.
driving. When storing a vehicle for
This also applies to the spare tire,
at least a month, remove the tires or
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
raise the vehicle to reduce the
never used. Multiple conditions
weight from the tires.
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
Treadwear indicators are one way to takes place. Tires will typically
tell when it is time for new tires. need to be replaced due to wear
Treadwear indicators appear when before they may need to be
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) replaced due to age. Consult the tire
or less of tread remaining. manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Buying New Tires GM recommends replacing all the

tires at the same time. Uniform tread { WARNING
GM has developed and matched depth on all tires will help to
specific tires for the vehicle. The maintain the performance of the Mixing tires of different sizes,
original equipment tires installed vehicle. Braking and handling brands, or types may cause loss
were designed to meet General performance may be adversely of control of the vehicle, resulting
Motors Tire Performance Criteria affected if all the tires are not in a crash or other vehicle
Specification (TPC Spec) system replaced at the same time. See Tire damage. Use the correct size,
rating. When replacement tires are Inspection on page 10‑63 and Tire brand, and type of tires on all
needed, GM strongly recommends Rotation on page 10‑63 for wheels.
buying tires with the same TPC information on proper tire rotation.
Spec rating. This vehicle may have a different
size spare than the road tires
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system { WARNING originally installed on the vehicle.
considers over a dozen critical When new, the vehicle included a
specifications that impact the Tires could explode during
spare tire and wheel assembly
overall performance of the improper service. Attempting to
with a similar overall diameter as
vehicle, including brake system mount or dismount a tire could
the road tires and wheels, so it is
performance, ride and handling, cause injury or death. Only your
traction control, and tire pressure all right to drive on it. The spare
dealer or authorized tire service
monitoring performance. GM's TPC tire was developed for use on this
center should mount or dismount
Spec number is molded onto the vehicle and will not affect vehicle
the tires.
tire's sidewall near the tire size. handling.
If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 10‑51 for additional
information.
Vehicle Care 10-67
The Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING label indicates the original { WARNING
equipment tires on the vehicle. See
Using bias-ply tires on the Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle may cause the wheel for the label location and more there may not be an acceptable
rim flanges to develop cracks information about the Tire and level of performance and safety if
after many miles of driving. Loading Information label. tires not recommended for those
A tire and/or wheel could fail wheels are selected. This
suddenly and cause a crash. Different Size Tires and increases the chance of a crash
Use only radial-ply tires with and serious injury. Only use GM
Wheels specific wheel and tire systems
the wheels on the vehicle.
If wheels or tires are installed that developed for the vehicle, and
are a different size than the original have them properly installed by a
If the vehicle tires must be replaced equipment wheels and tires, vehicle GM certified technician.
with a tire that does not have a TPC performance, including its braking,
Spec number, make sure they are ride and handling characteristics,
the same size, load range, speed stability, and resistance to rollover See Buying New Tires on
rating, and construction (radial) as may be affected. If the vehicle has page 10‑66 and Accessories and
the original tires. electronic systems such as antilock Modifications on page 10‑3 for
brakes, rollover airbags, traction additional information.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an control, and electronic stability
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if control, the performance of these
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are systems can also be affected.
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑58.
10-68 Vehicle Care
Uniform Tire Quality use spare tires, tires with Treadwear

Grading nominal rim diameters of The treadwear grade is a
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), comparative rating based on the
Quality grades can be found or to some limited-production
where applicable on the tire wear rate of the tire when tested
tires. under controlled conditions on a
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For While the tires available on specified government test
example: General Motors passenger cars course. For example, a tire
and light trucks may vary with graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA respect to these grades, they a half (1½) times as well on the
Temperature A must also conform to federal government course as a tire
The following information relates safety requirements and graded 100. The relative
to the system developed by the additional General Motors Tire performance of tires depends
United States National Highway Performance Criteria (TPC) upon the actual conditions of
Traffic Safety Administration standards. their use, however, and may
(NHTSA), which grades tires by All Passenger Car Tires Must depart significantly from the
treadwear, traction, and Conform to Federal Safety norm due to variations in driving
temperature performance. This Requirements In Addition To habits, service practices and
applies only to vehicles sold in These Grades. differences in road
the United States. The grades characteristics and climate.
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
Vehicle Care 10-69
Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire

The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained Balance
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate The tires and wheels were aligned
and C. Those grades represent and balanced at the factory to
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
provide the longest tire life and best
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can overall performance. Adjustments to
controlled conditions on lead to sudden tire failure. The wheel alignment and tire balancing
specified government test grade C corresponds to a level will not be necessary on a regular
surfaces of asphalt and of performance which all basis. However, check the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet alignment if there is unusual tire
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
Warning: The traction grade vibrates when driving on a smooth
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might
straight-ahead braking traction need to be rebalanced. See your
tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
dealer for proper diagnosis.
acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
characteristics. established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
Temperature – A, B, C overloaded. Excessive speed,
The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
(the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled
10-70 Vehicle Care
Wheel Replacement Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or Using the wrong replacement { WARNING
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replacing a wheel with a used
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and nuts can be dangerous. It could
one is dangerous. How it has
wheel nuts should be replaced. affect the braking and handling of
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. been used or how far it has been
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
Some aluminum wheels can be driven may be unknown. It could
and cause loss of control, causing
repaired. See your dealer if any of fail suddenly and cause a crash.
a crash. Always use the correct
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
new GM original equipment
Your dealer will know the kind of nuts for replacement.
wheel.
wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the Notice: The wrong wheel can
same load-carrying capacity, also cause problems with
diameter, width, offset, and be bearing life, brake cooling,
mounted the same way as the speedometer or odometer
one it replaces. calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
clearance, and tire or tire chain
nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
clearance to the body and
System (TPMS) sensors with new
chassis.
GM original equipment parts.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Vehicle Care 10-71
Tire Chains Notice: Use tire chains only For Cargo or Passenger models
where legal and only when you with P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 or
must. Use chains that are the LT245/75R16 size tires, use Low
{ WARNING proper size for the tires. Install Profile Z-Chain cables. SAE Class S
Tire chains used on a vehicle them on the tires of the rear axle. chains are not recommended.
Do not use chains on the tires of If the vehicle has dual rear tires, do
without the proper amount of
the front axle. Tighten them as not use individual tire chains. Use
clearance can cause damage to
tightly as possible with the ends tire chains that fit across both dual
the brakes, suspension, or other securely fastened. Drive slowly
vehicle parts. The area damaged tires.
and follow the chain
by the tire chains could cause you manufacturer's instructions.
to lose control of the vehicle and If you can hear the chains If a Tire Goes Flat
you or others may be injured in a contacting the vehicle, stop and It is unusual for a tire to blow out
crash. To help avoid damage to retighten them. If the contact while driving, especially if the tires
the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, continues, slow down until it are maintained properly. If air goes
or remove the device if it is stops. Driving too fast or out of a tire, it is much more likely to
contacting the vehicle. Do not spinning the wheels with chains leak out slowly. But if there ever is a
spin the vehicle's tires. Follow the on will damage the vehicle. blowout, here are a few tips about
manufacturer's instructions. For Cutaway models with LT245/ what to expect and what to do:
75R16, LT225/75R16 or LT215/ If a front tire fails, the flat tire
85R16 size single or dual rear tires, creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
use Low Profile Z-Chain or SAE toward that side. Take your foot off
Class S cables. the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
10-72 Vehicle Care
A rear blowout, particularly on a

curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING { WARNING
may require the same correction as
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting Changing a tire can be
accelerator pedal and steer to under it to do maintenance or dangerous. The vehicle can slip
straighten the vehicle. It may be repairs is dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire. To
if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for help prevent the vehicle from
changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
{ WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Driving on a flat tire will cause vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only transmission in P (Park) or a
Re-inflating a tire after it has use it for changing a flat tire. manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
been driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a 3. Turn off the engine and do
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
blowout and a serious crash. not restart while the vehicle
and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire is raised.
to a level place, well off the road,
that has been driven on while if possible. Turn on the hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard remain in the vehicle.
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. 5. Place wheel blocks on both
tire service center repair or sides of the tire at the
replace the flat tire as soon as opposite corner of the tire
possible. being changed.
Vehicle Care 10-73
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Changing If you have a van with the
use the following example as a 15‐passenger seating arrangement,
guide to assist in the placement of Removing the Spare Tire and the equipment you will need is
the wheel blocks (A). Tools secured on the rear floor of the
passenger side of the vehicle.
If you have a cargo van or a
passenger van, the equipment you
will need is located in the passenger
side rear corner of the vehicle.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
To access the equipment, remove
the retaining wing bolt and lift it out
of the mounting bracket.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and
lift it off of the mounting bracket.
10-74 Vehicle Care
To lower the spare tire from the

vehicle:
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G)

to one or two of the jack handle
and the hoist extensions (F).
Insert the hoist extension end
through the hole in the rear
bumper.
The tools you will be using include:
2. Be sure the hoist extension end
A. Jack connects to the hoist shaft (E).
B. Jack Handle A. Spare Tire The chiseled end of the
extension is used to lower the
C. Hoist Extension B. Tire/Wheel Retainer spare tire.
D. Jack Handle Extension C. Hoist Cable 3. Turn the wheel wrench
E. Wheel Wrench D. Hoist Assembly counterclockwise to lower the
E. Hoist Shaft spare tire to the ground.
The spare tire is mounted in the rear
Continue to turn the wheel
underbody of the vehicle. F. Jack Handle and Hoist wrench until the spare tire can
You will use the hoist extension, the Extensions be pulled out from under the
jack handle extensions and the G. Wheel Wrench vehicle.
wheel wrench to remove the
underbody‐mounted spare tire.
Vehicle Care 10-75
If the spare tire does not lower to The spare tire is a full‐size tire, 3. Assemble the jack and tools:
the ground, the secondary latch like the other tires on the
is engaged causing the tire not vehicle.
to lower. See Secondary Latch 5. Put the spare tire near the
System on page 10‑81. flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
If the vehicle has plastic wheel nut
caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
The wheel nut caps are designed to
remain with the center cap. Remove
the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center Front Flat: Assemble the
piece, place the chisel end of the jack (A) together with the jack
wheel wrench in the slot on the handle (B), one or two jack
wheel and gently pry it out. handle extensions (D) and the
4. When the tire has been wheel wrench (E).
lowered, pull the tire toward you 1. Do a safety check before
so you can reach the tire proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A)
retainer and pull it up through Flat on page 10‑71 for more together with the jack handle (B),
the wheel opening. information. two jack handle extensions (D),
and the wheel wrench (E).
If you have a vehicle which was 2. Loosen all the wheel nuts with
completed from a cab and the wheel wrench. Do not
chassis, refer to the information remove them yet.
from body supplier/installer.
10-76 Vehicle Care
4. Position the jack under the

vehicle as shown.
The front position jacking point is
on the frame. The rear position
jacking point is on the rear axle.
If the exhaust system interferes
in the jack location in the rear
axle, such as in Diesel vehicles,
place the jack (A) on the
rear axle between the axle
housing and the shock absorber
bracket in order to avoid any
Front Position Rear Position
interference with the exhaust
pipe (B).
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack you could
be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
Front Position Rear Alternative Position (Diesel

Vehicles)
Vehicle Care 10-77
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Raising the vehicle with the jack wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
improperly positioned can an emergency, a cloth or a paper
damage the vehicle and even towel can be used; however, use
make the vehicle fall. To help a scraper or wire brush later to
avoid personal injury and vehicle remove all rust or dirt.
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the 6. Remove all the wheel nuts.
wheel wrench clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the 7. Take flat tire off of the mounting
ground so there is enough room surface.
for the spare tire to fit.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
off and cause an accident. When wheel bolts, mounting surfaces
changing a wheel, remove any and spare wheel.
rust or dirt from places where the
(Continued)
10-78 Vehicle Care
10. Lower the vehicle by turning

{ WARNING the jack handle { WARNING
counterclockwise. Lower the
Never use oil or grease on bolts jack completely. If wheel studs are damaged, they
or nuts because the nuts might can break. If all the studs on a
come loose. The vehicle's wheel wheel broke, the wheel could
could fall off, causing a crash. { WARNING come off and cause a crash.
Wheel nuts that are not tight can If any stud is damaged because
work loose. If all the nuts on a of a loose-running wheel, it could
wheel come off, the wheel can be that all of the studs are
come off the vehicle, causing a damaged. To be sure, replace all
crash. All wheel nuts must be studs on the wheel. If the stud
properly tightened. Follow the holes in a wheel have become
rules in this section to be sure larger, the wheel could collapse in
they are. operation. Replace any wheel if
its stud holes have become larger
or distorted in any way. Inspect
hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for
damage. Because of loose
running wheels, piloting pad
damage may occur and require
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with replacement of the entire hub, for
the rounded end of the nuts proper centering of the wheels.
toward the wheel. Tighten each When replacing studs, hubs,
wheel nut by hand until the wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to
wheel is held against the hub. use GM original equipment parts.
Vehicle Care 10-79
12. Put the wheel cover or the

{ WARNING center cap and plastic wheel
nut caps back on. Remove any
Wheel nuts that are improperly or wheel blocks.
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or Have a technician check the
come off. The wheel nuts should wheel nut tightness of all
be tightened with a torque wrench wheels with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification after the first 160 km
(100 miles) and then 1600 km
after replacing. Follow the torque
(1,000 miles) after that. Repeat
specification supplied by the
this service whenever you have
aftermarket manufacturer when a tire removed or serviced. See
using accessory locking wheel Capacities and Specifications
11. Use the wheel wrench to
nuts. See Capacities and on page 12‑2 for more
tighten the nuts firmly. Turn the
Specifications on page 12‑2 for wheel wrench clockwise and in information.
original equipment wheel nut a crisscross sequence as
torque specifications. shown.
Notice: Improperly tightened

wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and the cable is tight. The spare
and Tools tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the
center of the wheel, making sure
1. Put the tire on the ground at the
it is properly attached.
rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down. 3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of
the vehicle, keeping the cable 6. Make sure the tire is stored
tight. securely. Push, pull (A), and then
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
4. Put the chisel end of the hoist moves, use the wheel wrench to
extension on an angle through tighten the cable.
the hole in the rear door frame,
above the bumper. You will hear two clicks when the
tire is up all the way.
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle. 7. Return the jacking equipment to
Continue turning the wheel the proper location. Secure the
wrench until the tire is secure items and replace the jack cover.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Secondary Latch System

{ WARNING
This vehicle has an
underbody-mounted tire hoist Before beginning this procedure
assembly equipped with a read all the instructions. Failure to
secondary latch system. It is read and follow the instructions
designed to stop the spare tire from could damage the hoist assembly
suddenly falling off the vehicle if the and you and others could get
cable holding the spare tire is hurt. Read and follow the
damaged. For the secondary latch instructions listed next.
to work, the tire must be stowed
with the valve stem pointing down.
To release the spare tire from the
See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire secondary latch: If the cable is not visible, start
and Tools” under Tire Changing on this procedure at Step 6.
page 10‑73 for instructions on
storing the spare tire correctly. { WARNING 2. Turn the hoist extension
counterclockwise until
Someone standing too close
approximately 15 cm (6 in) of
during the procedure could be
cable is exposed.
injured by the jack. If the spare
tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is
behind you or on either side of
you as you pull the jack out from
under the spare.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if

the cable end is visible.
10-82 Vehicle Care
6. Lower the jack by turning the

wheel wrench counterclockwise.
Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is
hanging by the cable.
7. Disconnect the jack handle from
3. Attach the jack handle/jack the jack and carefully remove
handle extension and wheel the jack. Use one hand to push
wrench to the jack. against the spare while firmly
pulling the jack out from under
the spare tire with the
other hand.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, If the spare tire is hanging from
ahead of the rear bumper. the cable, assembly the wheel
Position the center lift point of wrench onto the hoist extension
the jack under the center of the and insert the chisel end of the
spare tire and turn the handle hoist extension into the hoist
clockwise to raise the jack until it shaft hole above the bumper.
lifts the secondary latch spring. Turn the wheel wrench
5. Keep raising the jack until the counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire stops moving upward spare the rest of the way.
and is held firmly in place. This 8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the
lets you know that the secondary cable and pull it through the
latch has released. The spare wheel opening. Pull the tire out
tire is now balancing on the jack. from under the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Notice: If you drive away before Full-Size Spare Tire After installing the spare tire on the
the spare tire or secondary vehicle, you should stop as soon as
latch system cable has been This vehicle, when new, may have possible and make sure the spare is
reinstalled, you could damage the had a fully-inflated spare tire. correctly inflated. The spare tire is
vehicle. Always reinstall this A spare tire may lose air over time, made to perform well at speeds
cable before driving the vehicle. so check its inflation pressure up to 112 km/h (70 mph) at the
regularly. See Tire Pressure on recommended inflation pressure, so
9. If the cable is hanging under page 10‑57 and Vehicle Load Limits
the vehicle, turn the wheel you can finish your trip.
on page 9‑12 for information
wrench in the hoist shaft hole in regarding proper tire inflation and Have the damaged or flat road tire
the bumper clockwise to raise loading the vehicle. For instruction repaired or replaced as soon as you
the cable back up. on how to remove, install or store a can and installed back onto the
Have the hoist assembly inspected spare tire, see “Removing the Flat vehicle. This way, a spare tire will
as soon as you can. You will not be Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” be available in case you need it
able to store a spare or flat tire and “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire again. Do not mix tires and wheels
using the hoist assembly until it has and Tools” under Tire Changing on of different sizes, because they will
been repaired or replaced. page 10‑73. not fit. Keep the spare tire and its
wheel together.
To continue changing the flat tire,
return to Step 4 of “Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools” under Tire
Changing on page 10‑73.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical
For more information about the the vehicle that would not be systems.
vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty. To avoid the possibility of the
page 10‑31.
Trying to start the vehicle by vehicles rolling, set the parking
If the vehicle battery has run down, pushing or pulling it will not brake firmly on both vehicles
you may want to use another work, and it could damage the involved in the jump start
vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle. procedure. Put an automatic
start your vehicle. Be sure to use transmission in P (Park) or a
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
the following steps to do it safely. manual transmission in
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system. N (Neutral) before setting the
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
parking brake.
has a 12-volt system with a Notice: If the radio or other

Batteries can hurt you. They can accessories are left on during the
be dangerous because: negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does jump starting procedure, they
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a could be damaged. The repairs
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles would not be covered by the
can be damaged. warranty. Always turn off the
. They contain gas that can
radio and other accessories when
explode or ignite. 2. Get the vehicles close enough jump starting the vehicle.
. They contain enough so the jumper cables can reach,
electricity to burn you. but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they
If you do not follow these steps are, it could cause a ground
exactly, some or all of these connection you do not want. You
things can hurt you. would not be able to start your
Vehicle Care 10-85
3. Turn off the ignition on both 5. Check that the jumper cables do
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary WARNING (Continued) not have loose or missing
accessories plugged into the insulation. If they do, you could
cigarette lighter or the accessory Be sure the battery has enough get a shock. The vehicles could
power outlet. Turn off the radio water. You do not need to add be damaged too.
and all lamps that are not water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables,
needed. This will avoid sparks here are some basic things you
and help save both batteries. has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, should know. Positive (+) will go
And it could save the radio! to positive (+) or to a remote
add water to take care of that
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
first. If you do not, explosive gas
positive (+) and negative (−) has one. Negative (−) will go to
terminal locations of the other could be present. an unpainted metal part or to a
vehicle. Battery fluid contains acid that remote negative (−) terminal if
On your van, use the unpainted can burn you. Do not get it on the vehicle has one. On your
radio antenna bracket as a you. If you accidentally get it in van, use the unpainted radio
remote negative (−) terminal. your eyes or on your skin, flush antenna bracket as a remote
the place with water and get negative (−) terminal.
{ WARNING medical help immediately. Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
Using an open flame near a short that would damage the
battery can cause battery gas to battery and maybe other parts
explode. People have been hurt
{ WARNING too. And do not connect the
doing this, and some have been negative (−) cable to the
Fans or other moving engine
blinded. Use a flashlight if you negative (−) terminal on the dead
parts can injure you badly. Keep
need more light. battery because this can cause
your hands away from moving sparks.
(Continued) parts once the engine is running.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Do not let the other end touch the vehicle with the dead battery.
anything until the next step. The On your van, use the unpainted
other end of the negative (−) radio antenna bracket as a
cable does not go to the dead remote negative (−) terminal.
battery. It goes to a heavy, Notice: Your vehicle uses the
unpainted metal engine part or unpainted radio antenna bracket
to a remote negative (−) terminal as a remote negative (−) terminal.
on the vehicle with the dead Move the antenna coax cable out
battery. On your van, use the of the way before clamping the
unpainted radio antenna bracket negative jumper cable to the fixed
as a remote negative (−) antenna bracket. Avoid touching
terminal. the negative cable clamp to the
6. Connect the red positive (+) air conditioning line. Failure to do
cable to the positive (+) terminal either of these could damage
of the dead battery. Use a your vehicle. The repairs would
remote positive (+) terminal if the not be covered by the warranty.
vehicle has one. Do not let the 9. Now start the vehicle with the
other end touch metal. Connect good battery and run the engine
it to the positive (+) terminal of for a while.
the good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 10. Try to start the vehicle that had
has one. the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it
7. Now connect the black probably needs service.
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote 8. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) terminal if the negative (−) cable to the
vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal location on
Vehicle Care 10-87
Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables

connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following:
wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black
may occur and damage the negative (−) cable from the
vehicle. The repairs would not be vehicle that had the dead
covered by the vehicle warranty. battery.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct 2. Disconnect the black
order, making sure that the negative (−) cable from the
cables do not touch each other or vehicle with the good battery.
other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
A. Unpainted Metal Part or Remote 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Negative (−) Terminal cable from the other vehicle.
B. Good Battery or Remote 5. Return the remote positive (+)
Positive (+) and Remote terminal cover to its original
Negative (−) Terminals position.
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
10-88 Vehicle Care
Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing:
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the towing capacity
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? Be
disabled vehicle should be towed vehicle – such as behind a motor sure to read the tow vehicle
with all four wheels off the home. The two most common types manufacturer's
ground. Care must be taken with of recreational vehicle towing are recommendations.
vehicles that have low ground known as dinghy towing and dolly
clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the . What is the distance that will be
equipment. Always flatbed on a vehicle with all four wheels on the travelled? Some vehicles have
car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the restrictions on how far and how
vehicle with two wheels on the long they can tow.
Consult your dealer or a
ground and two wheels up on a . Is the proper towing equipment
professional towing service if the
device known as a dolly. going to be used? See your
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program dealer or trailering professional
on page 13‑6. for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
. Is the vehicle ready to be
such as behind a motorhome, see towed? Just as preparing the
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this vehicle for a long trip, make sure
section. the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should Dolly Towing

not be towed with all four wheels on
the ground. Two-wheel-drive Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
transmissions have no provisions Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐Drive
for internal lubrication while being Vehicles
towed.
All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels
off the ground.
Two-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with all four wheels on the
Notice: If the vehicle is towed ground, or even with only two of
with all four wheels on the its wheels on the ground, will
ground, the drivetrain damage drivetrain components. Use the following procedure to tow
components could be damaged. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive the vehicle from the rear:
The repairs would not be covered vehicle with any of its wheels on 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
by the vehicle warranty. Do not the ground. vehicle following the dolly
tow the vehicle with all four manufacturer's instructions.
wheels on the ground.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly.
10-90 Vehicle Care
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
See Parking Brake on page 9‑36 Ground) – All‐Wheel‐Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the
for more information. Vehicles ground, or even with only two of
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components.
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Do not tow an all-wheel-drive
following the manufacturer's vehicle with any of its wheels on
instructions. the ground.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the tow vehicle will not be
started or driven for six weeks or
more, remove the battery cable The vehicle was not designed to be
from the negative terminal (post) towed with two wheels on the
of the battery to prevent the ground. To properly tow these
battery from draining while vehicles, they should be placed on
towing. a platform trailer with all four wheels
off the ground.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Appearance Care Washing the Vehicle precautions and appropriate

disposal of any vehicle care
The best way to preserve the finish
product.
Exterior Care is to keep it clean by washing it
often. Rinse the vehicle well, before
If dirt and/or contaminants build up washing and after to remove all
in the glass seals, use a cloth and Notice: Certain cleaners contain
cleaning agents completely. If they
water to clean the glass seals. chemicals that can damage the
are allowed to dry on the surface,
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will emblems or nameplates on the
they could stain.
make them last longer, seal better, vehicle. Check the cleaning
and not stick or squeak. Apply product label. If it states that it Dry the finish with a soft, clean
silicone grease with a clean cloth. should not be used on plastic chamois or an all-cotton towel to
During very cold, damp weather parts, do not use it on the vehicle avoid surface scratches and water
frequent application may be or damage may occur and it spotting.
required. See Recommended Fluids would not be covered by the High pressure car washes may
and Lubricants on page 11‑7. warranty. cause water to enter the vehicle.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct Avoid using high pressure washes
sunlight. Use a car washing soap. closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
Do not use cleaning agents that are surface of the vehicle. Use of power
petroleum based or that contain washers exceeding 8 274 kPa
acid or abrasives, as they can (1,200 psi) can result in damage or
damage the paint, metal or plastic removal of paint and decals.
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety
10-92 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Notice: Machine compounding or Exterior painted surfaces are
Lenses aggressive polishing on a subject to aging, weather and
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish chemical fallout that can take their
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a may damage it. Use only toll over a period of years. To help
soft cloth and a car washing soap to non-abrasive waxes and polishes keep the paint finish looking new,
clean exterior lamps and lenses. that are made for a basecoat/ keep the vehicle garaged or
Follow instructions under “Washing clearcoat paint finish on the covered whenever possible.
the Vehicle.” vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Finish Care Foreign materials such as calcium Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing chloride and other salts, ice melting
Bright metal parts should be
of the vehicle by hand may be agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
cleaned regularly to keep their
necessary to remove residue from bird droppings, chemicals from
luster. Washing with water is all that
the paint finish. Approved cleaning industrial chimneys, etc., can
is usually needed. However, chrome
products can be obtained from your damage the vehicle's finish if they
polish may be used on chrome or
dealer. remain on painted surfaces. Wash
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ If necessary, use non-abrasive Use special care with aluminum
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat cleaners that are marked safe for trim. To avoid damaging protective
gives more depth and gloss to the painted surfaces to remove foreign trim, never use auto or chrome
colored basecoat. Always use matter. polish, steam or caustic soap to
waxes and polishes that are clean aluminum. A coating of wax,
non-abrasive and made for a rubbed to high polish, is
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades Aluminum Wheels The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
Clean the outside of the windshield Notice: Using strong soaps,
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
with glass cleaner. chemicals, abrasive polishes,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
Clean the rubber blades using a lint cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
free cloth or paper towel soaked that contain acid on aluminum or
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
with windshield washer fluid or a chrome-plated wheels, could
on them because they could
mild detergent. Wash the windshield damage the surface of the
damage the surface. Do not use
thoroughly when cleaning the wheel(s). The repairs would not
chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved Notice: Driving the vehicle
buildup of vehicle wash/wax
cleaners on aluminum or through an automatic car wash
treatments may cause wiper
chrome-plated wheels. that has silicone carbide tire
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
cleaning brushes, could damage
if they are worn or damaged. Keep the wheels clean using a soft
the aluminum or chrome-plated
Wipers can be damaged by: clean cloth with mild soap and
wheels. The repairs would not be
water. Rinse with clean water. After
. Extreme dusty conditions. covered by the vehicle warranty.
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft
Never drive a vehicle that has
. Sand and salt. clean towel. A wax may then be
aluminum or chrome-plated
applied.
. Heat and sun. wheels through an automatic car
Notice: Using chrome polish on wash that uses silicone carbide
. Snow and ice, without proper aluminum wheels could damage tire cleaning brushes.
removal. the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Tires Finish Damage flushed. Your dealer or an

underbody car washing system can
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush Any stone chips, fractures or deep
do this.
with tire cleaner. scratches in the finish should be
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will Underbody Maintenance
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense. Chemicals used for ice and snow
vehicle may damage the paint removal and dust control can collect
finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be on the underbody. If these are not
a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials removed, corrosion and rust can
any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger develop on the underbody parts
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
corrected in your dealer's body and and exhaust system even though
Sheet Metal Damage paint shop. they have corrosion protection.
If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and snow At least every spring, flush these
requires sheet metal repair or removal and dust control can collect materials from the underbody with
replacement, make sure the body on the underbody. If these are not plain water. Clean any areas where
repair shop applies anti-corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can mud and debris can collect. Dirt
material to parts repaired or develop on the underbody parts packed in close areas of the frame
replaced to restore corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, should be loosened before being
protection. and exhaust system even though flushed. Your dealer or an
Original manufacturer replacement they have corrosion protection. underbody car washing system can
parts will provide the corrosion At least every spring, flush these do this.
protection while maintaining the materials from the underbody with
vehicle warranty. plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being
Vehicle Care 10-95
Chemical Paint Spotting Interior Care which they were not intended. Use
glass cleaner only on glass.
Some weather and atmospheric The interior will continue to look its Remove any accidental over-spray
conditions can create a chemical best if it is cleaned often. Although from other surfaces immediately. To
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall not always visible, dust and dirt can prevent over-spray, apply cleaner
upon and attack painted surfaces on accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt directly to the cleaning cloth.
the vehicle. This damage can take can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped and plastic surfaces. Regular Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
discolorations, and small, irregular vacuuming is recommended to when cleaning glass surfaces on
dark spots etched into the paint remove particles from the the vehicle, could scratch the
surface. upholstery. It is important to keep glass and/or cause damage to the
the upholstery from becoming and rear window defogger. When
Although no defect in the paint job
remaining heavily soiled. Soils cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
causes this, we will repair, at no
should be removed as quickly as use only a soft cloth and glass
charge to the owner, the surfaces of
possible. The interior may cleaner.
new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months or experience extremes of heat that Many cleaners contain solvents that
20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase, could cause stains to set rapidly. may become concentrated in the
whichever occurs first. Lighter colored interiors may require breathing space. Before using
more frequent cleaning. Use care cleaners, read and adhere to all
because newspapers and garments safety instructions on the label.
that transfer color to home While cleaning the interior, maintain
furnishings may also transfer color adequate ventilation by opening the
to the interior. doors and windows.
When cleaning the interior, only use Dust may be removed from small
cleaners specifically designed for buttons and knobs using a small
the surfaces being cleaned. brush with soft bristles.
Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for
10-96 Vehicle Care
Products that remove odors from

. Too much cleaner that saturates To clean:
the upholstery and clean the glass the upholstery.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
can be obtained from your dealer. . Cleaners that contain solvents cloth with water or club soda.
Do not clean the vehicle using: can damage the interior.
2. Wring the cloth to remove
. A knife or any other sharp object Fabric/Carpet excess moisture.
to remove a soil from any interior Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 3. Start on the outside edge of the
surface. brush attachment frequently to soil and gently rub toward the
. A stiff brush. It can cause remove dust and loose dirt. center. Continue cleaning, using
damage to the interior surfaces. A canister vacuum with a beater bar a clean area of the cloth each
. Heavy pressure or aggressive in the nozzle may only be used on time it becomes soiled.
rubbing with a cleaning cloth. floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
Use of heavy pressure can For any soil, always try to remove it area until the cleaning cloth
damage the interior and does first with plain water or club soda. remains clean.
not improve the effectiveness of Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using 5. If the soil is not completely
soil removal. removed, use a mild soap
one of the following techniques:
. Laundry detergents or solution and repeat the cleaning
dishwashing soaps with
. For liquids: gently blot the process that was used with plain
degreasers can leave residue remaining soil with a paper water.
that streaks and attracts dirt. For towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no If any of the soil remains, a
liquid cleaners, about 20 drops commercial fabric cleaner or spot
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a more can be removed.
lifter may be necessary. When a
good guide. Use only mild, . For solid dry soils: remove as commercial upholstery cleaner or
neutral-pH soaps. much as possible and then spot lifter is to be used, test a small
vacuum. hidden area for colorfastness first.
Vehicle Care 10-97
If the locally cleaned area gives any can alter the appearance by Care of Safety Belts
impression that a ring formation may increasing the gloss in a
Keep belts clean and dry.
result, clean the entire surface. non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
{ WARNING
used to blot excess moisture from panel. The increase in gloss may Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
the fabric or carpet. cause annoying reflections in the It may severely weaken them. In
windshield and even make it difficult a crash, they might not be able to
Instrument Panel, Vinyl and to see through the windshield under
other Plastic Surfaces provide adequate protection.
certain conditions. Clean safety belts only with mild
A soft cloth dampened with water Notice: Air fresheners contain soap and lukewarm water.
may be used to remove dust. If a solvents that may cause damage
more thorough cleaning is to plastics and painted surfaces.
necessary, a clean soft cloth Follow the manufacturer’s
dampened with a mild soap solution instructions when using air
can be used to gently remove dust fresheners in the vehicle. If air
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or freshener comes in contact with
removers on plastic surfaces. Many paint or a plastic surface, blot
commercial cleaners and coatings immediately with a soft cloth.
that are sold to preserve and Damage caused by using air
protect soft plastic surfaces may fresheners would not be covered
permanently change the by the vehicle warranty.
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
10-98 Vehicle Care

. Use the floor mat with the
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
correct side up. Do not turn
proper floor mat usage.
it over.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for the
. Do not place anything on top of
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need the driver side floor mat.
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended . Use only a single floor mat on
interfere with the accelerator that GM certified floor mats be the driver side.
pedal and/or brake pedal. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
. Do not place one floor mat on
Interference with the pedals can top of another.
cause unintended acceleration interfere with the accelerator or
and/or increased stopping brake pedal. Always check that
distance which can cause a crash the floor mats do not interfere
and injury. Make sure the floor with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information As the vehicle owner, you are

responsible for the scheduled
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine. For
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
diesel engine vehicles, see the perform these services. Proper
General Information maintenance schedule section in vehicle maintenance helps to keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax Diesel Supplement. the vehicle in good working
Notice: Maintenance intervals, condition, improves fuel economy,
Scheduled Maintenance checks, inspections, and reduces vehicle emissions for
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3 recommended fluids, and better air quality.
Recommended Fluids, lubricants are necessary to keep Because of all the different ways
Lubricants, and Parts this vehicle in good working people use vehicles, maintenance
Recommended Fluids and condition. Damage caused by needs vary. The vehicle might need
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 failure to follow scheduled more frequent checks and services.
Maintenance Replacement maintenance might not be Please read the information under
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 covered by the vehicle warranty. Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
Maintenance Records your dealer.
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The maintenance schedule is for The proper replacement parts,

vehicles that: { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
. Carry passengers and cargo listed in Recommended Fluids and
Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
within recommended limits on be dangerous. Some jobs can
the Tire and Loading Information Maintenance Replacement Parts on
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑9. We recommend the use
label. See Vehicle Load Limits maintenance work only if you
on page 9‑12. of genuine parts from your dealer.
have the required know-how and
. Are driven on reasonable road the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
surfaces within legal driving If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
limits. have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is
. Use the recommended fuel. See work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation
Recommended Fuel on Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed.
page 9‑42. Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 mi. See Tire
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑63.
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained service
technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment to
ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.

. Windshield washer fluid level
Scheduled Your dealer has trained service
technicians who will perform this check. See Washer Fluid on
Maintenance work and reset the system. If the page 10‑27.
engine oil life system is reset . Windshield wiper blade
When the Change Engine Oil accidentally, service the vehicle inspection for wear, cracking,
Soon Message Displays within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the or contamination and windshield
Change engine oil and filter. See last service. Reset the oil life and wiper blade cleaning,
Engine Oil on page 10‑7. An system whenever the oil is changed. if contaminated. See Exterior
Emission Control Service. See Engine Oil Life System on Care on page 10‑91. Worn or
page 10‑11. damaged wiper blade
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
replacement. See Wiper Blade
SOON message displays, service is Every Engine Oil Change
Replacement on page 10‑37.
required for the vehicle as soon as . Change engine oil and filter.
possible, within the next 1 000 km/ . Tire inflation pressures check.
Reset oil life system. See
600 mi. If driving under the best See Tire Pressure on
Engine Oil on page 10‑7 and
conditions, the engine oil life system page 10‑57.
Engine Oil Life System on
might not indicate the need for page 10‑11. An Emission Control . Tire wear inspection. See Tire
vehicle service for more than a year. Service. Inspection on page 10‑63.
The engine oil and filter must be
. Engine coolant level check. See . Rotate tires if necessary. See
changed at least once a year and
the oil life system must be reset. Engine Coolant on page 10‑20. Tire Rotation on page 10‑63.
. Engine cooling system . Fluids visual leak check (or
inspection. Visual inspection of every 12 months, whichever
hoses, pipes, fittings, and occurs first). A leak in any
clamps and replacement, system must be repaired and the
if needed. fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filter clean cloth makes them last Additional Required Services
inspection. See Engine Air longer, seal better, and not stick
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑18. or squeak. At the First 160 km/100 Miles,
1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and
. Brake system inspection (or . Restraint system component 10 000 km/6,000 Miles
every 12 months, whichever check. See Safety System
occurs first). Check on page 3‑23.
. For vehicles with dual wheels:
Check dual wheel nut torque.
. Steering and suspension . Fuel system inspection for For proper torque, see
inspection. Visual inspection for damage or leaks. Capacities and Specifications on
damaged, loose, or missing page 12‑2.
parts or signs of wear.
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
. Lubricate the front suspension, damaged components.
kingpin bushings, steering . Rotate tires. Tires should be
linkage, and rear driveline center
. Vehicles with diesel engine or rotated every 12 000 km/
splines. GVWR above 4 536 kg 7,500 mi. See Tire Rotation on
(10,000 lbs) only: Shields page 10‑63.
. Body hinges and latches, key inspection for damage or
lock cylinders, folding seat looseness. Adjust or replace as At Each Fuel Stop
hardware, and rear compartment required. This is a Noise
hinges, linkage, and handle pivot
. Engine oil level check. See
Emission Control Service. Engine Oil on page 10‑7.
points lubrication. See Applicable to vehicles sold in the
Recommended Fluids and United States and recommended
. Engine coolant level check. See
Lubricants on page 11‑7. More for vehicles sold in Canada. Engine Coolant on page 10‑20.
frequent lubrication may be . Windshield washer fluid level
required when the vehicle is check. See Washer Fluid on
exposed to a corrosive page 10‑27.
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
Once a Month
. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer
Support Gas Strut Service: case fluid change (severe
. Tire inflation pressures check. Visually inspect gas strut, service) for vehicles mainly
See Tire Pressure on if equipped, for signs of wear, driven when frequently towing a
page 10‑57. cracks, or other damage. Check trailer, or used for taxi, police,
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire the hold open ability of the gas or delivery service. Check vent
Inspection on page 10‑63. strut. Contact your dealer if hose at transfer case for
service is required. kinks and proper installation.
Once a Year Check to be sure vent hose is
. First Engine Oil Change After unobstructed, clear, and free of
See Starter Switch Check on
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles debris. During any maintenance,
page 10‑35.
. Engine air cleaner filter if a power washer is used to
. See Automatic Transmission
replacement. See Engine Air clean mud and dirt from the
Shift Lock Control Function
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑18. underbody, care should be taken
Check on page 10‑35.
. Automatic transmission fluid to not directly spray the transfer
. See Ignition Transmission Lock case output seals. High pressure
change (severe service) for
Check on page 10‑36. water can overcome the seals
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
. See Park Brake and P (Park) city traffic in hot weather, in hilly and contaminate the transfer
Mechanism Check on or mountainous terrain, when case fluid. Contaminated fluid
page 10‑36. frequently towing a trailer, will decrease the life of the
or used for taxi, police, transfer case and should be
. Accelerator pedal check for replaced.
damage, high effort, or binding. or delivery service. See
Replace if needed. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission) on
. Underbody flushing service. page 10‑12 or Automatic
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 10‑14.

. Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After
. Spark plug replacement and
inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles spark plug wires inspection. An
vapor lines and hoses for proper Emission Control Service.
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid
Check that the purge valve, change (normal service). See First Engine Oil Change After
Automatic Transmission Fluid Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed. An (4-Speed Transmission) on . Engine cooling system drain,
Emission Control Service. The page 10‑12 or Automatic flush, and refill (or every five
U.S. Environmental Protection Transmission Fluid (6-Speed years, whichever occurs first).
Agency or the California Air Transmission) on page 10‑14. See Engine Coolant on
Resources Board has . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer page 10‑20. An Emission
determined that the failure to case fluid change (normal Control Service.
perform this maintenance item service). Check vent hose at . Engine drive belts inspection for
will not nullify the emission transfer case for kinks and fraying, excessive cracks,
warranty or limit recall liability proper installation. Check to be or obvious damage (or every
prior to the completion of the sure vent hose is unobstructed, 10 years, whichever occurs
vehicle's useful life. We, clear, and free of debris. During first). Replace, if needed.
however, urge that all any maintenance, if a power
recommended maintenance washer is used to clean mud
services be performed at the and dirt from the underbody,
indicated intervals and the care should be taken to not
maintenance be recorded. directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the
maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑7.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑20.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Parking Brake Cable Guides
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC or
Front Wheel Bearings
GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Front and Rear Axle
Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
One-Piece Propshaft Slip Yoke
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in
Spline, Two-Piece Propshaft
Canada 10953511).
Slip-in-Tube Spline
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

If the vehicle has the Duramax® diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15950115 A3097C
Engine Oil Filter
4.3L V6 25010792 PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12568387 41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 25949887 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the rear edge of the
passenger side front door, has the
following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System without Rear Heat
4.3L V6 9.5 L 10.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt
6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4.3L V6 12.3 L 13.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt
6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal
Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal
Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal
* 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-SPD 4L60-E 4.7 L 5.0 qt
6-SPD 6L90 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)
4.8L V8 A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 4 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.0L V8 G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting GMC, remember 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, that your concern will likely be decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without why we suggest following Step One other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call first. to you.
1-800-462-8782, Customer STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Assistance prompt. In Canada, call Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
General Motors of Canada dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Customer Communication at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English) or with the new vehicle. However,
1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification Number out-of-court program administered
(VIN). This is available from the by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
vehicle registration or title, or the Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
plate at the top left of the disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filling out a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call GMC encourages customers to call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer the toll-free number for assistance.
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre, However, if a customer wishes to
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), write or e-mail GMC, the letter
participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited United States
Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication GMC Customer Assistance Center
of owner disputes involving Centre P.O. Box 33172
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Detroit, MI 48232-5172
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005
the review of the facts involved by www.GMC.com
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)
may include an informal hearing 1-800-462-8583 (For Text
before the arbiter. The program is Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 Telephone Devices (TTYs))
designed so that the entire dispute The inquiry should be accompanied Roadside Assistance:
settlement process, from the time by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-462-8782
you file your complaint to the final Number (VIN). From Puerto Rico:
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe 1-800-496-9992 (English)
our impartial program offers 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
advantages over courts in most Front U.S. Virgin Islands:
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge. 1-800-496-9994
Canada Mexico, Central America and Online Owner Center

General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. GMC Owner Center (U.S.)
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Virgin Islands) www.gmcownercenter.com
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de Information and services
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V. customized for your specific
www.gmc.ca Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 place.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada . Digital owner manual, warranty
1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. information, and more.
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0801 . Storage for online service and
Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801 maintenance records.
1-800-268-6800
. GMC dealer locator for service
All Overseas Locations Customer Assistance for nationwide.
Please contact the local General Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Motors Business Unit. Users . Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle.
hard of hearing, or speech impaired . OnStar and GM Cardmember
and who use Text Telephones
Services Earnings summaries.
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing:
1-800-462-8583. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
GMC — www.gmc.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
GMC Merchandise —
www.gmccollection.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.gmc.com/ current offers in your area.
helpcenter . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ (Frequently Asked as address and phone number
Questions) for each of your preferred GM
. Contact Us dealers. This program is available to
. My Driveway: Access quick links qualified applicants for cost
My GM Canada www.gm.ca reimbursement of eligible
to parts and service estimates,
My GM Canada is a check trade-in values, aftermarket adaptive equipment
password-protected section of or schedule a service required for the vehicle, such as
www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the hand controls or a wheelchair/
information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your scooter lift for the vehicle.
personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. For more information on the limited
tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
profile and use tools and forms call the GM Mobility Assistance
with greater ease. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca Telephone (TTY) users, call
section within www.gm.ca. 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also Calling for Assistance Coverage

has a Mobility Program. Call
When calling Roadside Assistance, Services are provided up to 5 years/
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
have the following information 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
details. TTY users call
ready: comes first.
1-800-263-3830.
. Your name, home address, and In the U.S., anyone driving the
Roadside Assistance home telephone number. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
Program . Telephone number of your
permission from the owner is not
location.
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call covered.
1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text Telephone . Location of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). . Model, year, color, and license the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, plate number of the vehicle. GMC and General Motors of
call 1-800-268-6800. . Odometer reading, Vehicle Canada Limited reserve the right to
Service is available 24 hours a day, Identification Number (VIN), and make any changes or discontinue
365 days a year. delivery date of the vehicle. the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
. Description of the problem.
GMC and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided
. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Not Included in
change a flat tire with the spare Roadside Assistance
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Delivery of enough fuel for the must be in good condition and . Impound towing caused by
vehicle to get to the nearest properly inflated. It is the owner's violation of any laws.
service station. responsibility for the repair or . Legal fines.
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
. Mounting, dismounting,
unlock the vehicle if you are
or changing of snow tires,
locked out. A remote unlock . Battery Jump Start: Service to chains, or other traction devices.
may be available if you have jump start a dead battery.
OnStar®. For security reasons, . Towing or services for vehicles
the driver must present
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed driven on a non-public road or
identification before this service maps of North America when highway.
is given. requested either with the most
direct route or the most scenic Services Specific to
. Emergency Tow From a Public route. Additional travel Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
Road or Highway: Tow to the information is also available.
nearest GMC dealer for warranty
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
Allow three weeks for delivery.
service, or if the vehicle was in a is approximately $5 Canadian.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
crash and cannot be driven. Diesel fuel delivery may be
Assistance is also given when Assistance: If your trip is restricted. Propane and other
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, interrupted due to a warranty fuels are not provided through
mud, or snow. failure, incidental expenses may this service.
be reimbursed during the . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)
registration is required.
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel, . Trip Routing Service: Limit of
meals, and rental car. six requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation
over 250 kilometres from Appointments Program
where your trip was started to When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership
qualify. General Motors of service, contact your dealer and experience, we and our participating
Canada Limited requires request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
pre-authorization, original scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support
detailed receipts, and a copy and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the
of the repair orders. Once of your transportation needs, your Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
authorization has been received, dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada),
the Roadside Assistance advisor inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or
will help to make arrangements hybrid‐specific warranties in both
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department the U.S. and Canada.
payment.
immediately, keep driving it until it The Courtesy Transportation
. Alternative Service: If can be scheduled for service, program is no longer available for
assistance cannot be provided unless, of course, the problem is cutaway vehicles.
right away, the Roadside safety related. If it is, please call
Assistance advisor may give Several Courtesy Transportation
your dealership, let them know this, options are available to assist in
permission to get local and ask for instructions.
emergency road service. You will reducing inconvenience when
receive payment, up to $100, If your dealer requests you to bring warranty repairs are required.
after sending the original receipt the vehicle for service, you are
to Roadside Assistance. urged to do so as early in the work
Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for the
covered, however any cost for same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Courtesy Transportation is not a one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service Courtesy Rental Vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance Your dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area. you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
entitled “Warranty and Owner reimburse you for a rental vehicle
Assistance Information” furnished Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
with each new vehicle provides for an overnight warranty repair.
detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight Rental reimbursement will be limited
information. warranty repairs, and public and must be supported by original
transportation is used instead of receipts. This requires that you sign
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the and complete a rental agreement
Warranty service can generally be expense must be supported by and meet state/provincial, local, and
completed while you wait. However, original receipts and can only be up rental vehicle provider requirements.
if you are unable to wait, GM helps to the maximum amount allowed by Requirements vary and may include
to minimize inconvenience by GM for shuttle service. In addition, minimum age requirements,
providing several transportation for U.S. customers, should you insurance coverage, credit card,
options. Depending on the arrange transportation through a etc. You are responsible for fuel
circumstances, your dealer can friend or relative, limited usage charges and may also be
offer one of the following: reimbursement for reasonable fuel responsible for taxes, levies, usage
expenses may be available. Claim fees, excessive mileage, or rental
Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle service is the preferred and be supported by original repair.
means of offering Courtesy receipts. See your dealer for
Transportation. Dealers may provide information regarding the allowance It may not be possible to provide a
shuttle service to get you to your amounts for reimbursement of fuel like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
destination with minimal interruption or other transportation costs.
of your daily schedule. This includes
Additional Program Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in
Information prior crashes. In most cases, the
If the vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from
All program options, such as shuttle collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle.
service, may not be available at damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM
every dealer. Please contact your technician using the proper part may be an acceptable choice to
dealer for specific information equipment and quality replacement maintain the vehicle's originally
about availability. All Courtesy parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety
Transportation arrangements will be repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of
administered by appropriate dealer value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts
personnel. be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New
General Motors reserves the collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
right to unilaterally modify, change, Collision Parts related failures are not covered by
or discontinue Courtesy that warranty.
Transportation at any time and to Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials Aftermarket collision parts are also
resolve all questions of claim available. These are made by
eligibility pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was companies other than GM and may
conditions described herein at its not have been tested for the vehicle.
sole discretion. originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to As a result, these parts may fit
ensure that the vehicle's designed poorly, exhibit premature durability/
appearance, durability, and safety corrosion problems, and may not
are preserved. The use of Genuine perform properly in subsequent
GM parts can help maintain the GM collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not
may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty.
parts are typically removed from
Repair Facility When purchasing insurance, we Give only the necessary information
recommend that you ensure that the to police and other parties involved
GM also recommends that you
vehicle will be repaired with GM in the crash.
choose a collision repair facility that
original equipment collision parts. For emergency towing see
meets your needs before you ever
If such insurance coverage is not Roadside Assistance Program on
need collision repairs. Your dealer
available from your current page 13‑6.
may have a collision repair center
insurance carrier, consider switching
with GM-trained technicians and Gather the following information:
to another insurance carrier.
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair If the vehicle is leased, the leasing . Driver name, address, and
center that has GM-trained company may require you to have telephone number.
technicians and comparable insurance that ensures repairs with . Driver license number.
equipment. Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
. Owner name, address, and
Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement telephone number.
Protect your investment in the GM parts. Read the lease carefully, as . Vehicle license plate number.
vehicle with comprehensive and you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle make, model, and
collision insurance coverage. There model year.
are significant differences in the If a Crash Occurs . Vehicle Identification
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms. If there has been an injury, call Number (VIN).
Many insurance policies provide emergency services for help. Do not . Insurance company and policy
reduced protection to the GM leave the scene of a crash until all number.
vehicle by limiting compensation for matters have been taken care of.
damage repairs by using Move the vehicle only if its position
. General description of the
aftermarket collision parts. Some puts you in danger, or you are damage to the other vehicle.
insurance companies will not instructed to move it by a police
specify aftermarket collision parts. officer.
Choose a reputable repair facility Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Publications
that uses quality replacement parts. but you must live with the repair.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this Depending on your policy limits,
Ordering Information
section. your insurance company may Service Manuals
If the airbag has inflated, see What initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with Service Manuals have the diagnosis
Will You See after an Airbag and repair information on the
Inflates? on page 3‑32. the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember, engines, transmission, axle,
Managing the Vehicle Damage if the vehicle is leased, you may be suspension, brakes, electrical,
Repair Process obligated to have the vehicle steering, body, etc.
repaired with Genuine GM parts, Service Bulletins
In the event that the vehicle requires even if your insurance coverage
damage repairs, GM recommends does not pay the full cost. Service Bulletins give additional
that you take an active role in its technical service information
repair. If you have a pre-determined If another party's insurance needed to knowledgeably service
repair facility of choice, take the company is paying for the repairs, General Motors cars and trucks.
vehicle there, or have it towed there. you are not obligated to accept a Each bulletin contains instructions
Specify to the facility that any repair valuation based on that to assist in the diagnosis and
required replacement collision parts insurance company's collision policy service of the vehicle.
be original equipment parts, either repair limits, as you have no
new Genuine GM parts or recycled contractual limits with that company.
original GM parts. Remember, In such cases, you can have control
recycled parts will not be covered by of the repair and parts choices as
the GM vehicle warranty. long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety

1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
Owner publications are written Defects
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational For Credit Card Orders Only
information about the vehicle. The (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Reporting Safety Defects
Owner Manual includes the Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. to the United States
Maintenance Schedule for all Or write to: Government
models.
Helm, Incorporated If you believe that your vehicle
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, P.O. Box 07130
Owner Manual, and Warranty has a defect which could cause
Detroit, MI 48207 a crash or could cause injury or
Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without death, you should immediately
RETAIL SELL PRICE: notice and without incurring inform the National Highway
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and obligation. Allow ample time for
shipping fees.
Traffic Safety Administration
delivery. (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Without Portfolio: Owner All listed prices are quoted in U.S. General Motors.
Manual only. funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
If NHTSA receives similar
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
complaints, it may open an
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees. investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
Current and Past Models group of vehicles, it may order a
Technical Service Bulletins and recall and remedy campaign.
Manuals are available for current However, NHTSA cannot
and past model GM vehicles. become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety like this, please notify General
defect, notify Transport Canada Motors.
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General Call 1-800-GMC-8782
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Motors of Canada Limited. Call (1-800-462-8782), or write:
Washington, D.C. 20590 them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
GMC Customer Assistance Center
You can also obtain other Transport Canada P.O. Box 33172
information about motor Road Safety Branch Detroit, MI 48232-5172
vehicle safety from 2780 Sheffield Road
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
This GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, the vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as law
control engine and transmission enforcement, could combine the
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely
and deploy airbags in a crash, and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: acquired during a crash
if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation.
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help your dealer technician special equipment is required, and
service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such as
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal. information if they have access to
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
GM will not access this data or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by Radio Frequency

share it with others except: with the pressing the Q button and
consent of the vehicle owner or,
Statement
speaking to an advisor.
if the vehicle is leased, with the This vehicle has systems that
consent of the lessee; in response Radio Frequency operate on a radio frequency that
to an official request by police or comply with Part 15 of the Federal
similar government office; as part of Identification (RFID) Communications Commission (FCC)
GM's defense of litigation through RFID technology is used in some rules and with Industry Canada
the discovery process; or, as vehicles for functions such as tire Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
required by law. Data that GM pressure monitoring and ignition Operation is subject to the following
collects or receives may also be system security, as well as in two conditions:
used for GM research needs or may connection with conveniences such
be made available to others for as key fobs for remote door locking/ 1. The device may not cause
research purposes, where a need is unlocking and starting, and interference.
shown and the data is not tied to a in-vehicle transmitters for garage 2. The device must accept any
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. door openers. RFID technology in interference received, including
GM vehicles does not use or record interference that may cause
OnStar® personal information or link with any undesired operation of the
If the vehicle is equipped with an other GM system containing device.
active OnStar system, that system personal information.
Changes or modifications to any of
may also record data in crash or these systems by other than an
near crash‐like situations. The authorized service facility could void
OnStar Terms and Conditions authorization to use this equipment.
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont.) Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

When Should an Airbag Assistance Program,
Accessories and
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Airbags CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Add-On Electrical
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Audio System
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-18
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Automatic
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-35 Automatic
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27, 9-31
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
Anti-theft Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12, 10-14
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Antilock Brake Shift Lock Control
Passenger Sensing
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
What Makes an Airbag
Appearance Care Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
What Will You See after an
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement (cont.) CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Center High-Mounted
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-42 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Check
Voltage and Charging
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-37 C Ignition
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-36
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
California Child Restraints
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-23
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Infants and Young
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Perchlorate Materials Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lower Anchors and
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-52
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Capacities and Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-62, 3-65
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Carbon Monoxide Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Center High-Mounted
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Cleaning
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Front Turn Signal,
Cautions, Danger, and Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Sidemarker, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Climate Control System
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
INDEX i-3
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Customer Assistance (cont.) Door

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Customer Information Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Service Publications Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Customer Satisfaction Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 D Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Drive Systems
Coolant Danger, Warnings, and All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-35
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Driver Information
Engine Temperature Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Daytime Running Driving
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Characteristics and
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Courtesy Transportation Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
i-4 INDEX
Driving (cont.) Engine Enhanced Technology

If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check and Service Engine Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dual Tire Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 F
E Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Fan
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Electrical Equipment, Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Filter,
Electrical System Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Compartment Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-48 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Fuses and Circuit Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Engine Oil Fluid
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Automatic
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Transmission . . . . . . . 10-12, 10-14
INDEX i-5
Fluid (cont.) Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 General Information

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Fuses Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Engine Compartment Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-48 Glass, Enhanced
Front Seats Fuses and Circuit Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Front Turn Signal G
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Gasoline H
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Gauges Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Engine Coolant Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling a Portable Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-43 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Daytime Running
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Requirements, California . . . . .9-43 Warning Lights and High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Fuel Economy
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
i-6 INDEX
Heater J LATCH System

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Replacing Parts after a
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36 Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Keyless Entry Lighting
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
How to Wear Safety Belts Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Lights
L Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
I Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Idle System Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Antilock Brake System
Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Lamps (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23
Ignition Transmission Lock Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Exterior Lamps Off Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Infants and Young Children, Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-24
INDEX i-7
Lights (cont.) Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20 Mirrors

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Locks Messages Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-38 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Battery Voltage and Monitor System, Tire
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 N
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
for Children (LATCH Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 O
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
M Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Off-Road
Maintenance Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10
Maintenance Schedule Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Recommended Fluids and Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
i-8 INDEX
Oil Parking Power (cont.)

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11 Brake and P (Park) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Engine Oil Pressure Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36 Pregnancy, Using Safety
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Parking Lamps Privacy
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Radio Frequency
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44 Passenger Airbag Status Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Program
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Operation, Infotainment Perchlorate Materials Proposition 65 Warning,
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Ordering Personalization
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 R
Outlets Phone Radio Frequency
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Power Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Radios
P Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Park Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
INDEX i-9
Rear Axle (cont.) Replacement Parts Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Running the Vehicle While
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-43 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Replacing LATCH System
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59 S
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Replacing Safety Belt Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-24 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Recommended Reporting Safety Defects Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14 How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Fluids and General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Records Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-24
Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Safety Defects Reporting
Reimbursement Program, Ride Control Systems Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Remote Keyless Entry Roads U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Roadside Assistance Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8
i-10 INDEX
Seats Service (cont.) Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Shift Lock Control Function Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Check, Automatic Storage Areas
Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-81 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Securing Child Shifting Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-62, 3-65 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Security Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Switches
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Sidemarker Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Service Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Accessories and Signals, Turn and System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Specifications and
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 T
Maintenance, General Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 StabiliTrak Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Publications Ordering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-35
INDEX i-11
Tires Tires (cont.) U

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70
Uniform Tire Quality
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 When It Is Time for New
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Towing V
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-48 Vehicle
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-48 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88 Identification
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Trailer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-81 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Terminology and Transmission Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27, 9-31 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Uniform Tire Quality Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-12, 10-14 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Vehicle Care
Wheel Alignment and Tire Transportation Program, Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Vehicle Identification
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Service Parts Identification
Turn and Lane-Change Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
i-12 INDEX
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 When It Is Time for New

Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
W Enhanced Technology
Warning Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Windshield
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Winter
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Wheels Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-37
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

2011 GMC Savana Owner

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 GMC Savana Owner

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GMC Savana Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27

2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart . : Fuel Gauge

In Brief Vehicle Features

Initial Drive Press L and hold for more than

Power Windows Express‐Down Seat Adjustment

Power Seats Reclining Seatbacks To return the seatback to the upright

To adjust a power seat, if available, To recline the seatback:

Safety Belts Airbag On-Off Switch

Canada and Mexico

Sensing System for Mirror Adjustment

Vehicles with outside power mirrors

Interior Lighting E DOME OFF : This button is Exterior Lighting

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

The vehicle may have a Range

To use this feature, do the following: Vehicle Features

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth®

Steering Wheel Controls b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control

Replace the vehicle's tires with

How OnStar Service Works OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR technology compatible with

See Radio Frequency Statement on Your Responsibility

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Vehicle Security

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle,

{ WARNING Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic When the replacement transmitter is

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks Safety Locks

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Move the button to the left for the Doors

To open the front portion of a

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

To open the rear portion of a

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

To close the sliding side door from

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Vehicle Security The system is automatically armed

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows Power Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Press the switch to lower the Swing-Out Windows

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Enhanced Technology all crashes. Even with this glass,

Rear Swing‐Out Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19